Nissan - Titan - Workshop Manual - 2009 - 2009

Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Bearing Cap Page 538 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 5902 Brake Lamp: Service and Repair Removal And Installation STOP LAMP Removal and Installation HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Removal 1. Remove high-mounted stop lamp access covers(3). 2. Disconnect high-mounted stop lamp electrical connector. 3. Remove high-mounted stop lamp nuts(2). 4. Remove high-mounted stop lamp(1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. STOP LAMP Refer to See: Bulb Replacement. Page 3398 4. Push out and remove the remaining journal bearings at the opposite side by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke hole. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. ASSEMBLY Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select new snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/Snap Ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap rings Page 5832 Tachometer: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM TACHOMETER : Component Description Page 4517 6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to See: Ball Joint/Testing and Inspection . INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension for tightening torques. CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut. - When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Specifications/Front Disc Brake . When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. Page 963 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Pipe LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 3177 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The combination meter indicates the received shift position. Service and Repair Back Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING Removal and Installation FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS Removal 1. Remove the rear pillar finishers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When the rear window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension Wheel Alignment SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) Wheelarch Height SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) Page 5364 King Cab Page 1431 Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard............................................................................................................................................... ............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm Minimum............................................................................................................................................... ............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm Differential limit between cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0 Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm Page 2536 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 5745 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Description Page 6157 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Power Window Switch FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front power window switch assembly from the front door finisher RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front power window switch (1) from the power window switch finisher (2) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Removal Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Inspection After Removal Front Brake BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE FRONT BRAKE : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Brake tubes and hoses are important safety parts. Always disassemble the parts and retighten their fittings, if a brake fluid leak is detected. Replace applicable part with a new one, if damaged part is detected. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twists, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any parts as necessary. Refer to See: Diagrams. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg-f, 177 lb-f) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check each part for fluid leaks. Rear Brake BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE REAR BRAKE : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Brake tubes and hoses are important safety parts. Always disassemble the parts and retighten their fittings, if a brake fluid leak is detected. Replace applicable part with a new one, if damaged part is detected. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twists, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any parts as necessary. Refer to See: Diagrams. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg-f, 177 lb-f) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check each part for fluid leaks. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 11 1/4 Qts. (10.6L) Page 5510 CAUTION: Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle. Page 220 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Locations Navigation Module: Locations Page 635 Knock Sensor: Locations Special Service Tools Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Special Service Tools PREPARATION Special Service Tool Page 2561 Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Locations Exploded View Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Exploded View BRAKE PEDAL Exploded View Non-Adjustable Pedals Adjustable Pedals Page 685 Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Timing Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Classification: EM10-011 Reference: NTB10-099 Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Page 2519 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Base Audio Speaker: Service and Repair Base Audio Front Tweeter FRONT TWEETER Removal and Installation FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove the front tweeter (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Door Speaker FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and remove the front door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door Speaker REAR DOOR SPEAKER Page 5050 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 5381 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 1692 Page 106 With Intelligent Key System Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 202 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 3505 Control Module: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) - After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 3016 Page 2426 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 475 Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 - Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 - 10A fuse - Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace ASCD brake switch. 7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 9. NG - GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 - Fuse block (J/B) connector M60 - 10A fuse - Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Page 3873 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Lines Removal And Installation VACUUM LINES Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. 2. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose. 3. Remove check valve from brake booster. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Insert vacuum hose over the tube for 24 mm (0.94 in) or more. - Do not use lubricating oil during assembly. Inspection VACUUM LINES Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration. Replace as necessary. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Page 4139 Page 3646 Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 3313 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD) FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 2. Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 3. Measure the total preload torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). NOTE: Record the total preload torque measurement. 4. Remove the drive pinion nut using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( - ) 5. Put matching marks on the companion flange and drive pinion using paint. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching marks. Do not damage the companion flange or drive pinion. 6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) Page 2501 Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (PTC) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket Exploded View Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View IGNITION COIL Exploded View Page 5177 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 952 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 1228 Main Bearing Cap Follow the steps below to tighten each main bearing cap bolt. a. Apply engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts, and tighten all bolts temporarily. b. Measure tightening angle using Tool. Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) CAUTION: Measure tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually. Page 2632 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Locations Page 3918 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. Page 3312 to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Do not loosen drive pinion lock nut to adjust the total preload torque. If the total preload torque exceeds the specifications, replace the collapsible spacer and tighten it again to adjust. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. After adjustment, rotate drive pinion back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise, rotation malfunction, and other malfunctions. 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Check the differential gear oil level after installation. Refer to See: Fluid Differential/Service and Repair/Differential Gear Oil/Changing Differential Gear Oil. Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. System Diagram Odometer: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ODO/TRIP METER ODO/TRIP METER : System Diagram Locations Locations Page 1738 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 3950 ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J". Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the label attached to the top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5. Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester Vehicles with JIS Battery ^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on the battery. NOTE: DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery. Vehicles with CCA Battery ^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on the battery. Reference Material The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed. Page 432 12. Remove and replace the switch. 13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan. 14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto the seat frame. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9. WARNING: Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. 15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs. 16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8 Kg-m, 20 ft-lb). 17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan. 18. Re-attach the lower flap cover. Page 2124 Page 2524 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1655 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated/missing band clamp(s). ^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed. Page 3765 Brake Pad: Specifications Rear Brake Pad Brake model : AD14VE Standard thickness (new)..................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Repair limit thickness..................................... ............................................................................................................................................. 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Page 46 Page 3802 DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. Page 210 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 3092 Page 4164 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Page 4892 - Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. 1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors. 3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end. 4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring harness. 5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing. 6. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire. 7. Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness. 8. Locate the front passenger air bag service replacement connector that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector. System Diagram Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 557 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 296 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 3839 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Never reuse drained brake fluid. Revised Oil Pan / Timing Cover Service Oil Pan: Service and Repair Revised Oil Pan / Timing Cover Service Service Data Update Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Exploded View Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View SPARK PLUG Exploded View Page 4290 Monitor item ACTIVE TEST Test item Page 903 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5518 A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown. B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube. C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert. D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the rubber o-ring. E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5. F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant. 6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer. ^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube. 7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies. ^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base. 8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks. Page 4127 - Erase DTC. - Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time. NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. - Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10 10. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO TO 6 OK - Inspection End. IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Fail Safe Page 1240 Crankshaft: Service and Repair HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING How to Select Piston and Bearing DESCRIPTION *For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. - For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table. - For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure. HOW TO SELECT PISTON Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block, and select the piston of the same grade. When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure cylinder block bore diameter. 2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the "Cylinder bore diameter" of the piston selection table. Page 3212 Page 3625 CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb) Page 2460 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Page 3824 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Piping And Brake Hose BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove brake tube from brake hose, using a suitable tool. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from cylinder body. INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on cylinder body, then install the union bolt and new copper washers and tighten to specification. Refer to See: Diagrams. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal Seat Back: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal Classification: BT08-023A Reference: NTB08-062A Date: July 21, 20009 SEAT BACK BOARD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION This bulletin has been amended. Applied Vehicles has been updated. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2009 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains the Service Procedure for the removal and installation of the seat back board. Refer to Module A for removal and installation of the soft seat back board. Refer to Module B for the removal and installation of the hard seat back board. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Module A (for soft seat backs) 1. Move / adjust the front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position. 2. Remove the right front soft seat back board as follows: NOTE: The seat back board is held on with: ^ 2 top tabs ^ 2 side tabs ^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips from the Parts Information table). Page 1464 b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper). 21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 5655 Inspection Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Inspection TRANSFER FLUID Inspection CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: . FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer assembly or around it. 2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. 3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "Inspection". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 6151 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 3888 Page 5661 Page 3067 Page 133 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Diagnosis Description DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) Diagnosis Description AUTO ACTIVE TEST Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator - Oil pressure gauge - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure, "KING CAB See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine. Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. Page 1083 Page 2244 Page 5616 Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Diagnosis System (Meter) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (METER) CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A;) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Display Item List Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. DATA MONITOR Display Item List Page 1058 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications OIL Page 496 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Premium With Navigation DVD Player: Locations Premium With Navigation DVD PLAYER Component Parts Location Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 4352 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 3538 - Do not reuse oil seal. - Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. 2. Apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the new dust cover (1). Position the new dust cover as shown. CAUTION: - Do not reuse dust cover. - Position the identification mark at the position shown. - Rear case assembly (2) - Protrusions (A) 3. Install the new dust cover to the rear case using Tool. Tool number : KV40105310 ( - ) CAUTION: Do not reuse dust cover. - Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover. 4. Install the rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410. 5. Refill the transfer with fluid and check for fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid Transfer Case/Service and Repair. Page 1377 Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 5677 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM FUEL GAUGE : System Description The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied by the fuel level sensor unit. Page 1169 2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 4. Remove the cover from the engine. Disclaimer Page 4755 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) Control System Diagram MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Control System Diagram CONTROL SYSTEM The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below: Control System Description MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Control System Description CONTROL OPERATION Front air control Page 5839 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Low-Pressure Flexible Hose Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible Hose LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to See: Filters/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation . 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 2724 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 2618 Page 5555 Audible Warning Device: Locations Key Warning Chime WARNING CHIME SYSTEM KEY WARNING CHIME : Component Parts Location Page 2552 Page 4547 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 3116 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair OIL FILTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. - When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. - Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. - Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter : 17.7 N.m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) 4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. Refer to "Removal and Installation". 5. Install the engine front undercover. Service and Repair Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair BUZZER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the combination meter cover. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID A/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the two bolts (1), disconnect the connector (2) and remove the front buzzer. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Page 2024 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3014 Page 2328 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 5) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 5) Page 3070 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 2386 Page 1045 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Leakage Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear. Page 2610 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 11 1/4 Qts. (10.6L) Page 5054 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Wiring Diagram Integrated Homelink Transmitter - Part 1 Page 3525 Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 1356 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Exploded View OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Exploded View Page 4648 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Nozzle DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3286 2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to specification. Page 1514 Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Page 2334 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 11) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 11) Page 3136 b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not match. c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly. 3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 5619 Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Combination Meter COMBINATION METER Reference Value TERMINAL LAYOUT PHYSICAL VALUES Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2491 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3005 Page 1210 Locations Page 2578 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 5575 Page 1773 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 873 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3056 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 4740 CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : - (J-38873-A) 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Tool number : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) 7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. Changing Differential Gear Oil Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Changing Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the front final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the front final drive assembly. 2. Fill the front final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified level near the filler plug hole. Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Page 4890 Air Bag: Service and Repair Front Passenger Air Bag Module FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Follow the wiring harness modification procedure. REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. 1. Remove the glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember. 3. Disconnect the air bag module electrical connectors. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair. 4. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 5. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove air bag module from the instrument panel assembly. CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward. Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Page 140 Physical Values IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Physical Values PHYSICAL VALUES Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 3666 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 4166 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2200 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 6187 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Locations Page 1195 4. Paint alignment marks on the RH bank (A) timing chain links (C) and LH bank (B) timing chain links (D) and align with the camshaft sprocket alignment marks (E) and (F). 5. Remove the chain tensioner (LH) using the following steps. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. b. Secure plunger using stopper pin. - Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and the chain tensioner. NOTE: Stop plunger in the fully extended position using return-proof clip (1) if stopper pin is removed. - Push the plunger (2) into the chain tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip (1). Secure it using stopper pin (3). 6. Remove the chain tensioner cover from the front cover using Tool. Page 281 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Locations Page 4006 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 2731 Page 2053 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Page 118 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2 Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 1489 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 1826 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 3251 CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. - Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. - Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. - Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) in control valve with TCM. Page 2737 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection FUEL INJECTOR Component Inspection FUEL INJECTOR 1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5 ohms [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] Page 1077 Fuse: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 2486 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 2321 Past Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause. Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fusible Link 1 : Fusible link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of malfunction. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 5886 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 4232 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness. Page 5247 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 5737 Odometer: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ODO/TRIP METER : System Description The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by the combination meter and the mileage is displayed. HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER Refer to odo/trip meter operating instructions. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 3608 Page 2315 Past Error -- Open Circuit -- Review CAN communication signal chart based on information received from the interview with the customer and on past error information from SELF-DIAG RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR. 1. SELF-DIAG RESULTS: Inspect the control units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Stabilizer Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Classification: FA10-003A Reference: NTB10-072A Date: October 6, 2010 FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN 6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct 23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All IF YOU CONFIRM A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following actions: ^ turning the steering wheel left or right ^ driving over speed bumps ^ driving on rough roads ^ accelerating or decelerating AND The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing. ACTIONS Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and installation instructions. Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate Torque: 88.2 N.m (9.0 Kg-m, 65 ft-lb) Locations Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Page 2377 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 6230 Page 1462 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Service Data Update Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Exploded View Removal and Installation Page 4727 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5586 BCM (Body Control Module) BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Wiring Diagram Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Parking Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Brake Booster Page 630 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Page 3750 4. Remove piston seals from cylinder body, using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. - Do not reuse piston seals. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to new piston seals and insert seals into grooves on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seals. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 1050 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Refrigerant Type...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC 134a (R-134a) Page 819 System Diagram Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram Page 4469 With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 6044 Combination Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING and TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1838 Page 3826 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Piping And Brake Hose BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body. NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse. INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to specification. Refer to See: Diagrams. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. Page 1230 Piston Selection Table NOTE: The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. - The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available). HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 2. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 4. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table" to select. When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inside diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. The following steps are the same as in "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used". Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table Page 2516 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Locations Page 1002 NOTE: The A/T fluid level will be significantly affected by the A/T fluid temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the A/T fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-III. a. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-III. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1". 6. Re-check the A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown. The HOT range is between 50° - 80° C (122° - 176° F). CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth. - To check the A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown. 7. Check the A/T fluid condition. If the A/T fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may be an internal problem with the transmission. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning. Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission. - If the A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission. 8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe. 9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Page 3575 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The combination meter indicates the received shift position. Page 1708 Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Capacity With filter .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 6-7/8 U.S. qts (6.5 L) Without filter ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 6-1/2 U.S. qts (6.2 L) Page 5718 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Page 2504 Page 1109 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 925 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 4633 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nut Torque: 133 N.m (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb) When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications OIL Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2332 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 9) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 9) System Diagram Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Gear Page 3836 - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 2135 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 1437 - Install the camshaft sprocket INT (VTC) (A) and camshaft sprockets EXH (B) by selectively using the groove of the dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both exhaust banks.) NOTE: Use the groove marked "R" for RH bank and "L" for LH bank. Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the bolts. 3. Install the crankshaft sprockets for both banks. Install LH bank crankshaft sprocket (B) and RH bank crankshaft sprocket (C) so that their flange side (A) (the larger diameter side without teeth) faces in the direction shown. NOTE: The same parts are used but facing directions are different. 4. Install the timing chains and associated parts. Align the alignment mark on each sprocket and the timing chain for installation. CAUTION: Before installing timing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of alignment mark on timing chain and each sprocket. After the alignment marks are aligned, keep them aligned by holding them by hand. - Install the slack guides and tension guides onto the correct side by checking the identification mark on the surface. - Install the chain tensioner with the plunger locked in with the stopper pin. CAUTION: Before and after the installation of the chain tensioner, make sure that the alignment mark on the timing chain is not out of alignment. - After installing the chain tensioner, remove the stopper pin to release the chain tensioner. Make sure the chain tensioner is released. - To avoid chain-link skipping of the timing chain, do not move crankshaft or camshafts until the front cover is installed. 5. In the same way as for the RH bank, install the timing chain and associated parts on the LH bank. 6. Install the oil pump. 7. Install the oil pump drive spacer as follows: Locations Page 453 REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 4294 Physical Values IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Physical Values PHYSICAL VALUES Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Page 148 Page 3083 Page 3972 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning A/T FLUID COOLER A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning Whenever an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. Position a drain pan under the A/T inlet and outlet fluid cooler tube to cooler hose connection. 2. Put a different color matching mark on each cooler tube to cooler hose connection to aid in assembly. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark. Do not damage the tubes or hose. 3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes. NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. 4. Drain any A/T fluid from the cooler hose. 5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. - Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. - Avoid contact with eyes and skin. - Do not breath vapors or spray mist. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Classification: EL07-038B Reference: NTB08-039B Date: January 19, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only IF YOU CONFIRM The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch. WARNING: ^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip of the seat bottom cover. ^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. ^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure Page 1974 Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Check Valve Page 1329 EM-1 Page 429 7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate. 8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3. Page 697 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 3609 Control Module: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) - After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 1438 - Install so that the front mark on the front edge of the oil pump drive spacer faces the front of the engine. - Insert the oil pump drive spacer according to the directions of the crankshaft key and the two flat surfaces of the oil pump inner rotor. - If the positional relationship does not allow the insertion, rotate the oil pump inner rotor to allow the oil pump drive spacer to be inserted. 8. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. 9. Install the chain tensioner cover. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. 10. Install the front cover as follows: a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block. b. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Then install the front cover. Page 3797 IMPORTANT: If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform. Page 3068 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Electrical Units Location Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 4406 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Page 828 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 3973 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 5791 Page 1795 Attachment General Procedure Page 3314 INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal. Then drive the new front oil seal in evenly until it becomes flush with the gear carrier using Tool. Tool number : ST15310000 ( - ) CAUTION: Do not reuse front oil seal. - Do not incline the new front oil seal when installing. - Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips and differential gear oil to the circumference of the new front oil seal. 2. Install the companion flange to the drive pinion while aligning the matching marks. 3. Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion lock nut and new drive pinion lock nut washer. Then adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque using Tool A, and check the total preload torque using Tool B. - The total preload torque should be within the total preload torque specification. When not replacing the collapsible spacer, it should also be equal to the measurement taken during removal plus an additional 0.56 N.m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb). - If the total preload torque is low, tighten the drive pinion lock nut in 6.8 N.m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb) increments until the total preload torque is met. CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut or drive pinion lock nut washer. - Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion lock nut. - Adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque to the lower limit first. Do not exceed the drive pinion lock nut specified torque. Refer Page 3809 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert in to groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder body inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Apply rubber grease to sliding sleeves, then install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body. Page 3847 Brake Master Cylinder: Overhaul With ABS BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER With ABS DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Master cylinder assembly cannot be disassembled. - Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Pull reservoir tank off the master cylinder assembly. 2. Remove grommets from master cylinder assembly and discard the grommets. CAUTION: Discard the grommets, do not reuse. 3. Remove the fluid level sensor from the reservoir tank. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. - Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the new grommets, then insert the new grommets into the master cylinder assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the grommets. 2. Install reservoir tank onto the master cylinder assembly. 3. Install the fluid level sensor on the reservoir tank. With ABLS/VDC/TCS Page 2049 Page 5001 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 1645 10. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below. - Arrow indicates Front - A: Exhaust manifold (LH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Remove the oil level gauge guide. See: Engine/Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Exploded View See: Engine/Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. e. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as shown using power tool. f. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B). INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion - Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) - If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. Page 3974 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 3549 b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not match. c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly. 3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 3714 2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3 below for photos of OK and NG, conditions. Page 826 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 2110 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 5845 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1700 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Page 4357 Page 4681 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 4620 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 1960 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 3935 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 2265 Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Testing and Inspection EVAP CANISTER Component Inspection EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B. 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C. 3. Release blocked port B. 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C. 5. Block port A and B. 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. Page 190 Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 1759 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Removal and Installation Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR LOCK Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door window regulator. Refer to See: Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run. 3. Remove the door side grommet, and the bolt (TORX T30) (1) from the grommet hole (2). 4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove the door key cylinder assembly or outside handle escutcheon (2). 5. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped). 6. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward rear of vehicle to remove as shown. 7. Remove the front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2). Page 144 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1344 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped. 3. Drain engine oil. WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 4. Remove the oil cooler. 5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator. 6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly. 7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool. 8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position aside. 9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. 10. Remove upper radiator hose. 11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator. 12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan. 13. Disconnect the following connectors. - Harness ground - Power steering switch - A/C compressor - Oil pressure switch 14. Remove generator and generator bracket. 15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside. 16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool. 17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only). 18. Remove the steering gear. 19. Remove the oil pressure switch. 20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool. Page 4087 Page 5578 Procedures Battery: Procedures How to Handle Battery BATTERY How to Handle Battery CAUTION: If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery. - After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. - Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. - The terminal connections should be clean and tight. - At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries designated as "low maintenance" and "maintenance-free". - When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. (If the vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.) - Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge. CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL Locations Locations Oil Pressure Gauge: Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 5673 Page 300 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1545 - No. 3 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front - A: RH - B: LH - C: Exhaust - D: Intake - E: No. 2 cylinder - F: No. 4 cylinder Page 1229 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING How to Select Piston and Bearing DESCRIPTION *For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. - For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table. - For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure. HOW TO SELECT PISTON Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block, and select the piston of the same grade. When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure cylinder block bore diameter. 2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the "Cylinder bore diameter" of the piston selection table. Page 852 Page 3872 8. Install master cylinder to brake booster. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Replacement. 9. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. Refer to See: Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal. 10. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. 11. Install engine air duct assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 12. Install engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 13. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 2763 a. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the fuel tube. CAUTION: Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. - Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. - Do not clean O-ring with solvent. - Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. - When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. b. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel damper. NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part. c. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube. CAUTION: Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up. - Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value :130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb) d. Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns. - After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube. 2. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below. CAUTION: Upper and lower O-rings are different. - Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. - Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. - Do not clean O-ring with solvent. - Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. - When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. - Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it. 3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube. a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. - Insert clip so that lug "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip. CAUTION: Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one. - Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. - Insert it while matching it to the axial center. - Insert fuel injector so that lug "B" of fuel tube matches notch "B" of the clip. Page 849 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 2559 Page 3084 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". Page 257 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 1451 EM-3 Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 5624 Page 2876 Front Disc Brake Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Exploded View FRONT DISC BRAKE Exploded View of Brake Caliper Removal And Installation FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft Page 2078 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations Page 3346 - Check for any rough rotation or unusual axial looseness. - Clean any foreign material from inside the joint sub-assembly. - Check for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures. CAUTION: If any defective conditions are found in the joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint sub-assembly. Sliding Joint Side Housing Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear on the ball rolling surface. - Check for any damage to the drive shaft screws. - Check for any deformation of the boot installation components. Ball Cage Check the sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures. Steel Ball Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear. Inner Race Check the ball sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures. - Check for any damage to the serrated part. CAUTION: If any defective conditions are found, install a new housing, ball cage, steel ball, and inner race as a set. ASSEMBLY Final Drive Side 1. Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the boot band and boot to drive shaft. NOTE: Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for assembly. 2. Remove the tape wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft. 3. Install the ball cage, steel ball, and inner race assembly on the drive shaft, and secure them tightly using the snap ring. NOTE: Discard the old snap ring and use a new one for assembly. Page 1730 Page 759 8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 13. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Page 5453 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 4. CAUTION: Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle it with care. 4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body. 5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench. 6. Remove the lower flap cover. Page 615 Page 3389 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement Propeller Shaft 2F1310 PROPELLER SHAFT Removal and Installation COMPONENTS REMOVAL 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the front final drive companion flange as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of the front final drive. 2. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the transfer companion flange. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of the front final drive. 3. Remove the bolts and then remove the front propeller shaft from the front final drive and transfer. INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft Page 1246 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (US) bearing when the oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. - When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the inside diameter of the bearing installed and grind the journal until the oil clearance falls within specification. Bearing undersize table CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized bearing (All journals). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Page 113 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 2347 - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the differential lock control unit and the driver seat control unit. NO - Repair the main line between the differential lock control unit and the harness connector B37. Main Line Between ADP And DLC Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND DLC CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector B69 - Harness connector M40 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness connectors. Harness connectors B200 and B37 - Harness connectors B69 and M40 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors B37 and B69. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. - Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the driver seat control unit and the data link connector. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector M40 and the data link connector. Main Line Between DLC And M&A; Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND M&A; CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the following harness connectors. ECM Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fusible Link 1 : Fusible link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of malfunction. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 5620 Reference Value BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Reference Value VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Page 3768 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear REAR DISC BRAKE BRAKE PAD : Inspection PAD WEAR Check pad thickness from the inspection hole on cylinder body. Check using a scale if necessary. Page 3595 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 1174 Diagnosis Procedure Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to See: Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function. ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW 1" indication under the following conditions. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check "BRAKE SW 2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode. Page 272 Page 4716 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster grille from the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. With Intelligent Key System Starter Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 4614 Tires: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Tire Page 5861 Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM VOLTAGE GAUGE : Component Description Page 4647 Grilles Page 3455 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 1337 EM-10 Diagnosis Procedure Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to See: Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function. ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW 1" indication under the following conditions. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check "BRAKE SW 2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode. Page 1160 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 3111 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb) Page 2286 Information Bus: Description and Operation Diag On CAN Description DIAG ON CAN Description "Diag on CAN" is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1 and DDL2 communication lines, between control units and diagnosis unit. System Diagram DIAG ON CAN System Diagram Page 1142 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Axle Bearing Page 2475 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2490 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 1972 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 587 Combination Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING and TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5622 Terminal Layout BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Terminal Layout Page 610 Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Exploded View Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER FILTER Exploded View Page 1813 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 5866 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Component. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2344 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the A/T assembly and the harness connector F14. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors E50 and B75. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors E5 and E50. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the connector of differential lock control unit. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connector and the differential lock control unit harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the differential lock control unit. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector B75 and the differential lock control unit. Main Line Between TCM And ADP Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN TCM AND ADP CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector F14 - Harness connector E5 - Harness connector E50 - Harness connector B75 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness connectors. A/T assembly - Harness connectors F14 and E5 2. Check the continuity between the A/T assembly harness connector and the harness connector. Page 2062 Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications OIL Page 2326 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 3) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 3) Page 1762 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Exploded View Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Exploded View Page 4013 Power Socket - Part 2 Page 266 Page 2838 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Locations Page 1516 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Page 4064 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4 Page 517 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 245 Page 790 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Locations Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Page 1954 Page 649 Page 2617 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Page 3673 Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: Do not overfill. - Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. - Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance. Page 3736 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Removal and Installation BRAKE PEDAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: If equipped, before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. - If equipped, do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the pedal assembly. 3. If equipped, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. 4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster. 5. Remove nuts and the brake pedal assembly. Temporarily install nuts by hand to support brake booster. WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube. CAUTION: If equipped, before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. - If equipped, do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the brake pedal assembly for the following items. - Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper - Clevis pin deformation - Crack of any welded portion of the brake pedal assembly - Brake pedal bend or deformation Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Classification: EL99-016V Reference: NTB99-048V Date: March 11, 2010 BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery *For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007. SERVICE INFORMATION The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery, starter, and alternator tester. ^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators. ^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters, and/or alternators. ^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. ^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008. Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA. Page 6166 1. Raise the glass to the top. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between butyl adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then butyl adhesive to the leak point. Page 2268 CAN System - Part 3 Page 330 Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 124 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals received via CAN communication. CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed. Page 379 REPAIR FLOW CHART Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807 Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Classification: BT09-004 Reference: NTB09-074 Date: August 7, 2009 2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer. ACTION Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information. NOTE Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2616 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Page 2143 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 308 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 3683 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. Page 2215 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Front Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION System Diagram Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 3437 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 2305 COLLECT DATA Collect CONSULT-III Data Print out or save the following CONSULT-III data. SELF-DIAG RESULTS - CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included) NOTE: Some items may not be needed depending on CAN system type of vehicle. With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Headlamp Page 3337 Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection AXLE SHAFT On-Vehicle Inspection REAR AXLE Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary. - Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. - Retighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. Page 4758 Page 5094 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation AUDIO UNIT Removal and Installation AUDIO UNIT Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect the audio unit connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AV SWITCH Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the AV switch screws. 4. Carefully remove the AV switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Cargo Lamp Switch: Locations Page 329 Page 2201 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 4652 Grilles Page 2857 Page 4501 Lot Number Locations. Page 4779 4. Remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Page 4061 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Wiring Diagram IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1 Page 4468 Steering Wheel: Removal and Replacement STEERING WHEEL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Disconnect steering wheel switches. 4. Remove the steering wheel center nut. 5. Remove the steering wheel using Tools. CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. 6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. Remove steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. - If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement for steering angle sensor adjustment. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. - Tighten steering wheel center nut to specification. Refer to See: Steering Column/Service and Repair. CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. Locations Page 4240 Physical Values IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Physical Values PHYSICAL VALUES Page 6091 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3689 Page 3041 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". Power Consumption Control System Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 2726 - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 6197 Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above. Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to: ^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation ^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot holes) A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks. ^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an object striking the windshield. This is not covered under warranty. Page 5522 Truck Bed Storage Compartment: Service and Repair STORAGE BOX Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear mudguard (if equipped). Refer to See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Mud Flap/Service and Repair. 2. Remove bolts, release clips and remove storage box assembly. 3. Remove shelf bin and mat from storage box. 4. Remove storage box door from hinge. Remove door stay assembly. 5. Remove inner door cover. 6. Remove nuts and remove latch assembly from door. Remove key cylinder. 7. Remove outer seal and key cylinder lid assembly from door. Page 1052 Refrigerant: Service and Repair REFRIGERATION SYSTEM HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Locations Shift Indicator: Locations METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location Page 3201 4. Check the A/T fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. Page 3102 Page 5317 Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Body Mounting, Crew Cab BODY CONSTRUCTION Body Mounting, Crew Cab When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 295 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 4849 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Locations Standard Pedal Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection Standard Pedal BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment - Standard Pedal INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to the floor as shown. Tool number : - (J-46532) 2. Adjust the brake pedal height to specifications. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut (A) to specification. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 4286 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness. Page 1197 9. Remove the RH (A) front cover bolts and the LH (B) front cover bolts. 10. Remove RH (A) camshaft bracket bolts and LH (C) camshaft bracket bolts in the reverse of order shown to remove camshaft brackets. - Remove No. 1 camshaft bracket. NOTE: The bottom and front surface of bracket will be stuck because of liquid gasket. Arrow Indicates: Engine front - B: Exhaust side - D: Intake side 11. Remove the camshaft. 12. Remove the valve lifters if necessary. - Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the camshaft. 2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. Page 3806 REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut. 3. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body. NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse. 5. Remove sliding pin bolts (1) as shown, and remove cylinder body (2). 6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel hub assembly, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in place. CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. 2. Install cylinder body (2) and tighten sliding pin bolts (1) to specification. CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. Page 5087 Amplifier: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation AUDIO AMP. Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the accelerator pedal. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Accelerator Pedal/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the audio amp. speaker amp. connectors. 4. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp. and bracket assembly screws and slide the audio amp. speaker amp. bracket assembly down. 5. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp.screws (A). then remove the audio amp. speaker amp. (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3893 - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. - Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. - Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 477 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again. Page 2748 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. Page 1928 Page 3285 8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 13. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Page 4821 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications OIL Service and Repair Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair DOOR MIRROR Mirror Actuator DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. Remove the mirror glass. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Door Mirror Glass 2. Remove the center screw (A) and release the actuator hooks from housing (B). 3. Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the actuator (1). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Leaf Spring Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 2182 Page 6068 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 510 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Page 1468 Page 5860 Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM VOLTAGE GAUGE : System Description The voltage gauge indicates the battery/charging system voltage. The voltage gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit. Page 4008 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 4267 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Locations Page 6186 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 1602 Radiator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation RADIATOR Removal and Installation WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 1. Remove engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses. Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. 5. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses from radiator. CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to contact drive belts. 6. Remove the lower radiator shroud. Release the tabs, pull lower radiator shroud rearwards and down to remove. 7. Remove the radiator shroud upper bolts and remove the radiator shroud upper (A). 8. Remove the A/C condenser bolts and brackets. Page 5205 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 1107 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 235 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 3704 CLAIMS INFORMATION Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 673 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 2183 Page 5659 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Locations Page 4504 Page 1461 Install the bolts in the numerical order shown. Engine Compartment Automatic Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner MAGNET CLUTCH System Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature, refer to the following table. Page 1681 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation BCM Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the BCM. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 3402 2. Install the center support bearing on the propeller shaft tube using a suitable pipe pressing on the inner race. 3. Install a new clamp over the boot on the slip yoke. 4. Align the matching marks and install the slip yoke on the propeller shaft tube. 5. Clean the surfaces and position the boot over the propeller shaft tube and tighten the clamp. 6. Install the center support bearing bracket, then install the rear propeller shaft assembly in the vehicle. Refer to See: Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Locations Page 2809 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank Page 5707 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Description and Operation Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the figure below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the figure below. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4741 8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4891 - Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair. INSTALLATION Original Passenger Air Bag Module Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair. CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument panel pad assembly. 2. Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 3. Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket. CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is not required. CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. Page 1357 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 1. Remove the engine. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the oil pan (lower) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts using power tool. b. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Slide (1) the Tool by tapping (2) its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan. 3. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 4. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts as shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown, using suitable tool. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer control device. 4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 2. Install the transfer control device. a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a mark on the control shift rod. Page 223 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Procedures Fuel Filter: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 302 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1559 ^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate: P/N 999MP - L255QTP > The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application. > Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water). > Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label. Additional Information for using Blue LLC Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other: ^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green ^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue CAUTION: ^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles). ^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and cooling system damage may occur. Locations Page 139 Terminal Layout IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 830 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 2262 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 209 Page 5668 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 2279 Page 1136 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Service and Repair Antenna, Phone: Service and Repair TEL ANTENNA Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Slide the front passenger seat fully forward. 3. Remove the Bluetooth control unit kick shield screws and remove the Bluetooth control unit kick shield. 4. Remove the Bluetooth antenna screws (A), disconnect the Bluetooth antenna connector (B) and remove the Bluetooth antenna (1). Bluetooth control unit screws (C) - Bluetooth control unit (2) - Arrow Indicates Front of vehicle INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5975 Page 3315 to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Do not loosen drive pinion lock nut to adjust the total preload torque. If the total preload torque exceeds the specifications, replace the collapsible spacer and tighten it again to adjust. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). After adjustment, rotate drive pinion back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise, rotation malfunction, and other malfunctions. 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Check the differential gear oil level after installation. Refer to See: Fluid Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Page 5590 Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Page 5592 Audible Warning Device: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Airbag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 2902 Page 1827 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 1307 Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 2437 Page 3247 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A). CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 8. Straighten the four terminal clips to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Arrow Indicate Terminal clip 9. Straighten terminal clip to free the revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Do not damage connector. Page 3667 - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. - Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. - Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 2043 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 162 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation BCM Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the BCM. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 758 Switch: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. - Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front 6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. - For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 7. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 6109 Page 1116 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 2866 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal and Installation IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil. 3. Remove the ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4068 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals received via CAN communication. CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed. Page 4456 7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 8. On 2WD model, remove stabilizer bar bolts and reposition stabilizer bar. Refer to See: Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair. 9. Remove oil piping (high pressure side and low pressure side) from steering gear assembly, then drain fluid from piping. 10. Remove lower joint bolt on lower shaft. 11. Remove bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly using power tool, and then remove steering gear assembly from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair. - After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Locations Page 1659 WARNING: Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 2508 Body - Windshield Cracking Information Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information Classification: BT09-052 Reference: NTB09-091 Date: August 25, 2009 WINDSHIELD CRACKING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America (NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles. Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas: 1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass. 2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface. 3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues. CLAIMS INFORMATION Part Return Process Reminder Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to highlight the area damaged. 1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass. Cracks from objects striking the glass Page 856 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front lower link (2). CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt (1). Refer to table below for examples of lower link cam bolt (1) effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the cam bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. Page 2218 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1038 6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load. Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (175°F)] CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. 8. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows: a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Oil pressure switch torque : 14.7 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Rear Axle Shaft Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft AXLE SHAFT Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative. REMOVAL 1. Remove the ABS sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors. Locations Page 137 Locations Page 5627 Page 555 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 1338 EM-11 Page 3976 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 5678 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM FUEL GAUGE : Component Description Page 2510 Attachment General Procedure Page 2405 Page 5032 Page 312 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 3298 2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications CONNECTING ROD BEARING Undersize Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance Page 5911 Removal The vanity mirror lamp is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the tabs and remove the vanity mirror lamp lens (1). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tool (A) to protect the housing and lens. 3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight out to remove. Vanity mirror lamp bulb : 12V - 1.8W STEP LAMP Removal Page 747 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring Page 4412 6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to See: Suspension/Ball Joint/Testing and Inspection . INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Front Suspension for tightening torques. CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut. - When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Specifications/Front Disc Brake . When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. Page 1701 Page 4137 Terminal Layout IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 3391 REMOVAL 1. Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake. 2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the rear final drive companion flange as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or the companion flange. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive and transfer case. INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification. Locations Page 3004 Page 1547 - Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. Locations Page 2695 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 3721 Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Brake Pedal STANDARD PEDAL ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Page 2938 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The combination meter indicates the received shift position. Page 1213 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (RH). 3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Exploded View Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER FILTER Exploded View Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. 5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5595 Locations Page 1348 c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary. - Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type. - Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. - Check all fluid levels again. - Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. TIMING CHAIN COVER Page 712 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt retractor assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Locations Page 2037 - Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. Page 1023 2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Page 352 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 1469 Exploded View Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above. 2. Remove variable timing control solenoids. 3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors. 4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket. 5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. 6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. Page 1277 2. Install the rocker cover and tighten the bolts in two steps in the order shown. - A: Rocker cover LH - B: Rocker cover RH - Arrow indicates Engine front CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck. - Make sure the new rocker cover gasket is installed in the groove of the rocker cover. 3. Install the PCV hoses. NOTE: Remove foreign materials from inside the hose using compressed air. - The inserted length is within 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in) [Target: 25 mm (0.98 in)]. 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3837 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fusible Link 1 : Fusible link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of malfunction. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 1334 EM-6 Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Locations Page 2408 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5263 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Component Structure REAR DOOR LOCK Component Structure Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair KNUCKLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Suspension/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair . Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and bearing assembly for this procedure. 2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. - Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Coil Spring And Strut . 4. Support lower link using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint and discard the cotter pin. Page 1784 Page 4876 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt Inspection SEAT BELTS Seat Belt Inspection AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). - The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). - The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. - Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. - The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten drivers seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. 2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. 3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. 5. Check retractor operation: a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. Page 3951 Page 1971 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 4601 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 3991 Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTER MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the starter harness terminal nut connectors. 3. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. 4. Remove the starter. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully. Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) Page 5579 Page 4492 PARTS INFORMATION Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 3320 Switch: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. - Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front 6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. - For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 7. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 1313 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection ENGINE OIL Inspection OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. - Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. - If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to See: Maintenance. OIL APPEARANCE Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination. - If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair the broken parts. OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Oil pan - Oil pan drain plug - Oil pressure switch - Oil filter - Oil cooler - Intake valve timing control cover - Intake valve timing control solenoid valve - Front cover - Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head - Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover - Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear) OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. - Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position. 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "Inspection". 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure switch (A). 5. Install Tools. Page 2686 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. Page 2125 Parking Brake Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Brake Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard............................................................................................................................................... ............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm Minimum............................................................................................................................................... ............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm Differential limit between cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0 Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm Page 2409 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Description and Operation Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the figure below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the figure below. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1314 6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load. Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (175°F)] CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. 8. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows: a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Oil pressure switch torque : 14.7 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running. Page 1842 Page 5705 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 4353 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Locations Page 2439 Page 4678 1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2. 2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2. 3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1. 4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal. 5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved. Page 4953 4. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan. 5. Unclip connector attachment clip from seat bracket to remove buckle assy from seat. 6. install seat belt buckle and bolt. Page 3773 Removal And Installation REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Pad WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. - Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Remove sliding pin bolt from the top mount. 3. Swing cylinder body open and remove pads, shims, cover and retainers. INSTALLATION 1. Push piston in using a suitable tool. CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, makes it easier to push in the piston. 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to knuckle slide where brake pad contacts and to the outer multi-layered shim, pad retainers and inner shim. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pads or brake rotor friction surfaces. 3. Install pads, shims, cover and retainers to cylinder body. 4. Install cylinder body top sliding pin bolt and tighten to specification. Headlamp Page 4460 1. Install the inner sockets. 2. Install the large-diameter side of the boots to the gear housing assembly. 3. Install the small-diameter side of the boots to the groove of the inner sockets. 4. Install the boot clamps to the boots, as shown. CAUTION: Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps. 5. Crimp the large-diameter boot clamps, using Tool. Tool number : KV40107300 ( - ) 6. Install the cylinder tubes to the gear housing assembly. 7. Install the lock nuts and outer sockets to the inner sockets. Transfer Case TX15B Page 4110 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 2696 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Page 4792 Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 5254 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 2230 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 2357 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Combination Meter. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the combination meter branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. TCM Branch Line Circuit TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of A/T assembly. 2. Check the resistance between the A/T assembly harness connector terminals. Models with floor shift - Models with column shift Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the TCM branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Main Power Supply And Ground Circuit. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the TCM branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. CAN Communication Circuit CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system. 4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Page 836 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 4815 Refrigerant: Service and Repair REFRIGERATION SYSTEM HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 1358 CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 5. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. b. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side. Page 1466 d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12 2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper). 3. Install the oil pan (lower). a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section. CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. Page 3607 Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 4873 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Side And Rollover Collision COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Side and Rollover Collision Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Replace the following components: Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) - Diagnosis sensor unit - (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION) Locations Page 1679 Page 2091 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4377 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 5852 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 5572 Page 1434 Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. 8. Remove the oil pump drive spacer. Hold and remove the flat space of the oil pump drive spacer by pulling it forward. 9. Remove the oil pump. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 10. Remove the chain tensioner on the LH bank using the following steps. NOTE: To remove the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The procedure for removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for the LH bank. a. Squeeze the return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. b. Secure the plunger using stopper pin. - Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and chain tensioner. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when (squeezing) return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. NOTE: Stop the plunger in the fully extended position by using the return-proof clip (1) if the stopper pin is removed. - Push the plunger (2) into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip (1). Secure it using stopper pin (3). 11. Remove the timing chain tension guide and timing chain slack guide. 12. Remove the timing chain and crankshaft sprocket. Page 4056 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 4965 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt retractor assembly. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 2461 Page 2526 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 2243 Locations Page 5042 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position. NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 4593 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Locations Page 1059 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: MAX position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F)] - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 255 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Page 4816 Page 2451 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 696 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 5476 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 4. CAUTION: Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle it with care. 4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body. 5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench. 6. Remove the lower flap cover. Page 567 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Automatic Air Conditioner Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Component Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 5559 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Front Final Drive M205 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Final Drive M205 FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the drive shafts from the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Front Axle Shaft. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft from the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2F1310. 3. Measure the total preload torque. Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Front Final Drive M205/Inspection And Adjustment. NOTE: Record the total preload torque measurement. 4. Remove the drive pinion lock nut using Tool. Tool number : KV38108300 (J-44195) 5. Put matching marks on the companion flange and drive pinion using paint. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching marks. Do not damage the companion flange or drive pinion. 6. Remove companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Place a small hole in the front oil seal case using suitable tool. 8. Remove the front oil seal using Tool as shown. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 1535 CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Page 3229 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Locations Volt Meter Gauge: Locations METER SYSTEM VOLTAGE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 1592 Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 5132 Remote Control Module: Locations Hands-Free Phone System Page 647 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid Capacity Front 4WD Only ................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 1.6L (3-3/8 US,pt) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.01L (4-1/4 US,pt) Boot Bands Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Boot Bands SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Boot Bands Page 5519 9. Reinstall both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. 10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. 11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. 12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight. Locations Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Page 3253 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clip. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check the fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. Page 4739 adapter. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. 6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. INSPECTION Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. Page 2454 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 5656 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 5516 Disclaimer Service Procedure 1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place. 2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate. ^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. CAUTION: The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with the lids snapped closed. 3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. Page 1453 EM-5 Page 2231 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. A/T Shift Lock System Page 2150 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 390 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Belt. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 2911 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Page 3848 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER With ABLS/VDC/TCS DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Master cylinder assembly cannot be disassembled. - Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Pull the reservoir tank off the master cylinder assembly. 2. Remove the grommets from master cylinder assembly and discard the grommets. CAUTION: Discard the grommets, do not reuse. 3. Remove the fluid level sensor from the reservoir tank. 4. Remove the front and rear pressure sensors and discard. CAUTION: Discard the front and rear pressure sensors, do not reuse. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Never use mineral oil such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. - Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the new grommets, then insert the new grommets into the master cylinder assembly. CAUTION: Page 4214 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 1910 Knock Sensor: Locations Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 2799 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 5573 Page 2323 How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and reception unit. Data Sheet DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Data Sheet ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Page 4233 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Diagnosis Description DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) Diagnosis Description AUTO ACTIVE TEST Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator - Oil pressure gauge - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure, "KING CAB See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine. Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. Page 6005 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 5992 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Speedometer Module: Locations METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location Page 450 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Page 5055 Integrated Homelink Transmitter - Part 2 Page 2700 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 2330 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 7) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 7) Page 4183 Page 105 Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 3234 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 8. Wrap a shop rag around the tip of the air gun and the cooler outlet hose. 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler tubes to the A/T. 12. Remove the banjo bolts. 13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform A/T fluid cooler diagnosis. A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Position a drain pan under the A/T inlet and outlet fluid cooler tube to cooler hose connection. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. 3. Put a different color matching mark on each cooler tube to cooler hose connection to aid in assembly. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark. Do not damage the tubes or hose. 4. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes. NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. 5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. Page 2090 Page 5372 CAUTION: - Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. Removal 1. Remove rear seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove rear kicking plates. 3. Remove seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System. 4. Remove seatback latch strikers. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation. Page 3919 REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 3039 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1 example): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Page 2129 Attachment General Procedure Page 838 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 112 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 2588 Page 314 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 1985 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 5031 DVD Player: Description and Operation Premium With Navigation System Diagram DVD PLAYER System Diagram System Description DVD PLAYER System Description The DVD entertainment system consists of the following components Audio unit - DVD player - Video monitor - AV switch - Steering wheel audio control switches - Rear audio remote control unit - Audio amp. - Front tweeters - Front door speakers - Center speaker - Rear door tweeters (crew cab) - Rear door speakers - Subwoofer When the DVD entertainment system is on, video signals are sent from the DVD player to the video monitor. Audio signals are sent to the Audio unit. Audio signals can be directed through the wireless infrared headphones or through the audio amp. to the vehicle speakers. Refer to complete DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Component Description DVD PLAYER Component Description Page 2063 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation BCM Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the BCM. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 5112 CENTER SPEAKER Removal and Installation CENTER SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID C/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the center speaker screws and remove the center speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Door Speaker FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and remove the front door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door Speaker REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal Page 4941 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. - Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. Page 2915 CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Page 5186 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 805 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 4057 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid Capacity Front 4WD Only ................................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 1.6L (3-3/8 US,pt) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.01L (4-1/4 US,pt) Page 2289 Trouble Diagnosis TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor Use "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for detecting the root cause. MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-III) ECM Page 5160 Page 1202 Arrow indicates Front - Install No. 1 camshaft bracket using the following procedure: - C:11 mm (0.43 in) - D: 2.0 - 3.0 mm (0.079 - 0.118 in) dia. - Apply liquid gasket to No. 1 camshaft bracket (A) and (B) as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket outside of application (C) and (D) both on RH and LH sides. - Remove completely any excess of liquid gasket inside bracket. - Apply liquid gasket (C) to the back side of the LH (A) bank front cover and RH (B) bank front cover as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. C:2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner Page 51 Page 922 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 4348 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 2534 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 5912 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Insert a suitable tool between door finisher and step lamp lens/socket to release the pawls. CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around the suitable tool to protect door finisher and lens. 3. Disconnect the step lamp connector, then remove step lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the step lamp lens/socket. 3. Pull the bulb straight out to remove. Step lamp bulb : 12V - 3.8W PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE A (if equipped) Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove personal lamp screws (3). 4. Disconnect personal lamp electrical connectors (1), then remove personal lamp (2) from overhead console. Page 3104 Attachment General Procedure Page 269 Page 2507 Exploded View Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Exploded View Locations Page 4220 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4 Description and Operation Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Description FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin micro-filters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: . It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. Page 5373 5. Remove rear lower finishers LH/RH. 6. Remove rear upper finishers LH/RH. 7. Remove center anchor bracket cover, if equipped. 8. Remove rear panel upper finisher and rear panel. 9. Remover drafter duct cover and drafter duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Replacement Console: Removal and Replacement A/T Finisher A/T FINISHER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the shift knob (1). 2. Remove the storage compartment mask (3) and console upper finisher (4). 3. Pull up on A/T finisher (2) to release clips, then tilt aside. 4. Disconnect A/T finisher electrical connectors and remove from front center console assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Center Console CENTER CONSOLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Page 1804 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 6012 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 3119 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1788 Page 3095 Locations Page 3953 Battery: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Battery Page 142 Page 4901 - With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 2428 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Warning Chime System Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Warning Chime System System Diagram WARNING CHIME SYSTEM WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Diagram System Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description COMBINATION METER The buzzer for warning chime system is installed in the combination meter. - The buzzer sounds when the combination meter receives a buzzer output signal from each unit. BCM BCM receives signals from various units and transmits a buzzer output signal to the combination meter with CAN communication line if it judges that the warning buzzer should be activated. Component Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Component Description Page 536 Page 1028 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent Page 3503 Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 5671 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 5037 Page 4505 Page 2247 Page 3397 Propeller Shaft 2S1410 PROPELLER SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke. 2. Remove the snap rings. 3. Push out and remove the journal bearings by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke hole. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. Procedures Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures Propeller Shaft 2F1310 PROPELLER SHAFT On-Vehicle Service APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly. - Check the bearings for noise and damage. Repair or replace the bearings as necessary. PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/General Specification. 2. If the runout exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180° and 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft. 3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/General Specification. 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Propeller Shaft 2S1410 PROPELLER SHAFT On-Vehicle Service APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly. - Check the bearings for noise and damage. Repair or replace the bearings as necessary. PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first. Page 5796 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Locations Page 760 2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to specification. Page 1082 Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX Locations Page 1828 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 2479 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3786 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut. 3. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body. NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse. 5. Remove sliding pin bolts (1) as shown, and remove cylinder body (2). 6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel hub assembly, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in place. CAUTION: Page 2181 Locations Page 468 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Page 1812 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair KNUCKLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair . Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and bearing assembly for this procedure. 2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. - Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Coil Spring And Strut . 4. Support lower link using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint and discard the cotter pin. Page 4371 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Transfer Case TX15B Page 2416 With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 3674 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 218 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 5613 Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace key switch. NO - Repair harness or connector. FLOOR SHIFT 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch and key lock solenoid 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. NO - GO TO 2 2.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - GO TO 3 3.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect BCM and key switch and key lock solenoid connectors. 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M27. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 and ground. Locations Cargo Lamp Switch: Locations Page 2605 Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 3665 - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 2970 Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 5107 Removal and Installation REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab. 2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab. 2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear door tweeter connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Locations Page 705 Page 4010 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3395 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Overhaul Propeller Shaft 2F1310 PROPELLER SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the front propeller shaft or flange yoke. 2. Remove the snap rings. 3. Push out and remove the journal bearings by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke hole. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. 4. Push out and remove the remaining journal bearings at the opposite side by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke hole. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. Locations Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. 5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2946 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 2781 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 4651 Air Duct: Service and Repair Component DUCTS AND GRILLES Component Ducts - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 3526 Page 2565 Exploded View Valve Cover: Service and Repair Exploded View ROCKER COVER Exploded View Service and Repair Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair SIDE GUARD MOLDING Removal and Installation Removal CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints. Original side guard molding is affixed to the body panel with double-faced adhesive tape. 1. Heat the molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun. 2. Raise the end of the molding and cut away the tape to remove the molding. Remove all traces of tape. Installation On the vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200, C-100 or equivalent. - The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape. - To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new double faced tape to the molding. 1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F). Locations Locations Page 4287 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Diagnosis Description DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) Diagnosis Description AUTO ACTIVE TEST Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator - Oil pressure gauge - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure, "KING CAB See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine. Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. Page 2797 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Water Outlet and Water Piping Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Water Outlet and Water Piping THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation REMOVAL Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat. Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe. Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove the water cut valve. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the thread. - Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. - After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. INSTALLATION Page 1918 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 4225 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System System Diagram SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Diagram System Description SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System Description. Page 2837 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 2048 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 4609 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3384 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Propeller Shaft 2S1410 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Page 1923 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Page 2282 Page 823 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 924 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 1017 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Types Front(4WD) ............................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 or API GL-5 Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... API GL-5 Synthetic Gear Oil or equivalent Recommended Viscosity Front .................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 80W-90 Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... 75W-140 Page 4663 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor (1) is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser (front grille removed for clarity). 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1354 - B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) 5. Install the crankshaft pulley. - Install the key of the crankshaft. - Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. - Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt. - Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb) Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening) 7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. Relay Control System Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System System Diagram RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description Component Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Component PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Component Page 3196 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 4753 When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM. BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. Discharge Air Flow MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Discharge Air Flow Switches And Their Control Function MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Switches And Their Control Function Page 4907 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt retractor assembly. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 3021 Page 275 Page 5618 Diagnosis System (BCM) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) BUZZER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BUZZER) DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Page 1053 Locations Page 4457 - With steering wheel in straight ahead position, make sure slit of lower joint "A" fits with the projection on rear cover cap "B", while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear cover cap - After installation, bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. Page 4392 Page 4105 Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 5603 Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 4574 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using tool until the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two tools are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. 3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. - Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. - Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. Coil Spring Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. - Check the free spring height. ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on shock absorber, the lower end (2) and upper end (3) must be positioned as shown. Description and Operation Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. Bulb Replacement Fog/Driving Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement FRONT FOG LAMP Bulb Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1776 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 121 Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 2017 Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 5806 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Page 609 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Exploded View Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Exploded View Page 3779 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Rear Disc Brake Rear Disc Brake Page 474 Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 7. 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Page 5215 - Disconnect the harness connector. 9. Remove the door finisher and disconnect the lock cable and handle cable from the inside door handle assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation". 10. Remove the door lock knob. 11. Remove the inside door handle assembly screws and remove the inside door handle assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR - CREW CAB Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly. Disconnect the harness connector. 2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove the pull handle escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screws behind armrest. 6. Remove the step lamp (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector. 7. Remove the door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from the door handle assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear door tweeter speaker connector. Page 2327 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 4) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 4) A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3027 Attachment General Procedure Page 5506 4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate. 5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows: CAUTION: Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the plastic panel. a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic insert. b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as shown in Figure 4. c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the tube. NOTE: If the insert is difficult to remove: Page 3772 3. Hang cylinder body with a wire, and remove pads, pad retainers, shims, and shim cover from torque member. CAUTION: When removing the pad retainer from the torque member, lift it in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown so that it does not deform. INSTALLATION 1. Push piston in using suitable tool. CAUTION: In the case of replacing a pad with new one, check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid returns to reservoir tank when pressing piston in. NOTE: Use a suitable tool to easily press piston. 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease or equivalent to between shim cover and shim. Install outer shim, outer shim cover to inner pad, and inner multi-layered shim to outer pad. 3. Apply Molykote M-77 grease or equivalent to between pad retainer and pad. Install pad retainers and pads to torque member. 4. Apply Molykote M-77 grease or equivalent to the piston face. Install pad return lever securely to pad wear sensor as shown. CAUTION: Securely assemble pad retainers so that they are not being lifted up from torque member. - Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system on the pad retainer. Install pad return lever securely to pad wear sensor. 5. Install pads, shims, cover and retainers to cylinder body. 6. Install lower sliding pin bolt, and tighten it to the specified torque. 7. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 8. Install front wheel and tires. Exploded View REAR DISC BRAKE Exploded View of Brake Pads Page 4182 Fuse: Locations Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Oil Pan: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Classification: EM10-011 Reference: NTB10-099 Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Page 2525 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 641 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 4737 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) MAGNET CLUTCH System Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. Page 4210 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 5350 1. Remove tray and mat from console bin. 2. Remove latch from console lid. 3. Remove console lid. 4. Remove console lid hinge. 5. Remove console bin. 6. Disconnect electrical harness from DVD player (if equipped). 7. Remove rear upper finisher. 8. Remove rear cup holder assembly. 9. Remove rear finisher assembly. 10. Disconnect rear finisher assembly electrical connectors. 11. Remove console power socket. 12. Remove upper side finishers LH/RH. 13. Remove screws on each side, disconnect clips and remove console covers LH/RH. 14. Remove mask and storage compartment. 15. Remove console front bracket. 16. Remove heat duct and console rear duct. 17. Remove console rear bracket. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Page 1837 Page 1722 Procedures Fuel Filter: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2 Page 4124 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System System Diagram POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Description OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. - IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication. Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active. - CAN transmission is stopped. SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION - IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication. - Front wiper fail-safe operation - Outputting signals to actuators - Switches or relays operating - Auto active test is starting - Emergency OFF - Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication. - IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled. WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start. - Ignition switch ON - An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication. Page 488 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 721 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 3894 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Page 2192 Page 1352 12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) INSTALLATION 1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. 2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed). - Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. 3. Install the front cover as follows: a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block. b. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Page 55 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 686 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 3311 INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal. Then drive the new front oil seal in evenly until it becomes flush with the gear carrier using Tool. Tool number : ST15310000 ( - ) CAUTION: Do not reuse front oil seal. - Do not incline the new front oil seal when installing. - Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips and differential gear oil to the circumference of the new front oil seal. 2. Install the companion flange to the drive pinion while aligning the matching marks. 3. Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion lock nut and new drive pinion lock nut washer. Then adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque using Tool A, and check the total preload torque using Tool B. - The total preload torque should be within the total preload torque specification. When not replacing the collapsible spacer, it should also be equal to the measurement taken during removal plus an additional 0.56 N.m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb). - If the total preload torque is low, tighten the drive pinion lock nut in 6.8 N.m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb) increments until the total preload torque is met. CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut or drive pinion lock nut washer. - Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion lock nut. - Adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque to the lower limit first. Do not exceed the drive pinion lock nut specified torque. Refer Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest) Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out from square hole (A). 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing. Page 94 Page 1820 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 723 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 5508 9. Reinstall both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. 10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. 11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. 12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight. Page 5337 2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest. 3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly. 4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool. b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4. Page 1286 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard............................................................................................................................................... ............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm Minimum............................................................................................................................................... ............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm Differential limit between cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0 Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm Page 4370 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 3924 Page 2144 Page 1271 - Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Classification: HA08-006A Reference: NTB09-011A Date: March 10, 2010 BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds and then returns to normal operation. While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off. This condition may be intermittent. AND The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit. ACTION Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the part number is listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 4239 Terminal Layout IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 4356 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). ABS Page 111 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 2250 Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Procedure After Replacing ECM INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Procedure After Replacing ECM When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. 2. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. 4. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning. VIN Registration INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 5330 2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest. 3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly. 4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool. b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4. Page 4650 Air Duct: Service and Repair Grilles DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panels as necessary. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3663 - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 1624 Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Removal And Installation THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation REMOVAL Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat. Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe. Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove the water cut valve. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the thread. - Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. - After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. INSTALLATION Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 3672 Page 4216 System Diagram Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 4027 Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Page 3771 Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement Exploded View FRONT DISC BRAKE Exploded View of Brake Pads Removal And Installation FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Pads WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. - Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF) CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: . 1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge. 4. Drain the A/T fluid from the drain plug hole, then install the drain plug with a new gasket. Refill the transmission with new A/T fluid. Always refill with the same volume as the drained A/T fluid. Use the A/T fluid level gauge to check the A/T fluid level as shown. Add A/T fluid as necessary. Drain plug : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. - To flush out the old A/T fluid from the transmission oil coolers, pour new A/T fluid into the A/T fluid charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old A/T fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. - When the color of the A/T fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new A/T fluid, flushing out the old A/T fluid is complete. The amount of new A/T fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% increase of the specified capacity. A/T fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: . CAUTION: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. - Using ATF fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. - When filling the transmission with A/T fluid, do not spill the A/T fluid on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust parts. - Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. 5. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 6. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). 7. Check the fluid level and condition. If the A/T fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 6. 8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe and install the A/T fluid level gauge bolt. Locations Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Locations Cargo Lamp Switch: Locations Page 4752 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL Increases or decreases the set temperature. - When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. - When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. - REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor position. Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position, and turns A/C compressor ON. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED) When switch is ON, rear window and door mirrors are defogged. OFF SWITCH The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot (75% foot and 25% defrost) position. BLOWER CONTROL DIAL/OFF SWITCH The blower speed is manually controlled with this dial. - The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot position. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.) MODE SWITCHES Controls the air discharge outlets. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL Page 5138 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair SONAR SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear sonar sensor (1) from the rear bumper (2). 2. Disconnect the rear sonar sensor connector. 3. Remove the rear sonar sensor housing from the rear bumper (2). INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4138 Physical Values IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Physical Values PHYSICAL VALUES Page 2708 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4279 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System System Diagram SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Diagram System Description SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System Description. Page 566 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 1108 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Page 1754 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 1128 Tires: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Tire Page 2440 Page 4235 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R) APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. DATA MONITOR Page 3047 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 2172 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 3309 - If the total preload torque is low, tighten the drive pinion lock nut in 6.8 N.m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb) increments until the total preload torque is met. CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut. - Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion lock nut. - Adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque to the lower limit first. Do not exceed the drive pinion lock nut specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. Do not loosen drive pinion lock nut to adjust the total preload torque. If the drive pinion lock nut torque or the total preload torque exceeds the specifications, replace the collapsible spacer and tighten it again to adjust. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - After adjustment, rotate drive pinion back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise, rotation malfunction, and other malfunctions. 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Check the differential gear oil level after installation. Refer to See: Fluid Differential/Service and Repair/Changing Differential Gear Oil. Tow Truck Towing Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 4WD MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission. Page 1745 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. With Intelligent Key System Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 4018 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out from square hole (A). NOTE: Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) requires riveted finisher removal from bed prior to socket removal. 3. Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing. Page 4608 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1495 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 4366 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 581 Page 1658 ^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are located (see Figure 1 and 2 above). > The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield. > If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply. 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for example). Page 2985 Switch: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. - Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front 6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. - For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 7. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 4081 Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View SPARK PLUG Exploded View Page 3752 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake Exploded View REAR DISC BRAKE Exploded View of Brake Caliper Removal And Installation REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: - While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. - Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Page 4987 Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Removal and Installation SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Removal 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna connector. 3. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut. 4. Remove the satellite radio antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3120 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 2343 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 5. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors B75 and B69. 5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the A/T assembly and the data link connector. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector M40 and the data link connector. Main Line Between TCM And DIFF Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN TCM AND DIFF CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector F14 - Harness connector E5 - Harness connector E50 - Harness connector B75 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness connectors. A/T assembly - Harness connectors F14 and E5 2. Check the continuity between the A/T assembly harness connector and the harness connector. Models with floor shift - Models with column shift Page 294 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 2677 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Component Inspection PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. Page 263 Page 1288 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range (between three line notches). NOTE: Check the drive belt auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold. - The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the drive belt auto tensioner. 3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to See: Service and Repair. DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto tensioner. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 4261 ABLS/ABS Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4131 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Diagnosis Description DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) Diagnosis Description AUTO ACTIVE TEST Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator - Oil pressure gauge - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure, "KING CAB See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine. Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. Page 541 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 4297 Page 4275 Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 4702 1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2. 2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2. 3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1. 4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal. 5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved. Page 2896 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Service and Repair Dome Lamp Switch: Service and Repair ILLUMINATION Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal The illumination control switch (1) is replaced as a part of the combination meter assembly. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE B (if equipped) Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens (1). 3. Remove personal lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the connector, then remove personal lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Page 2301 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Trouble Diagnosis Procedure INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and to understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis. Points in interview What: Parts name, system name - When: Date, Frequency - Where: Road condition, Place - In what condition: Driving condition/environment - Result: Symptom NOTE: Check normal units as well as error symptoms. Page 1076 Page 3938 Page 4270 Locations Page 3254 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A). CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip (Arrow) to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. CAUTION: Page 2533 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 2079 Page 5230 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. Page 981 ^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate: P/N 999MP - L255QTP > The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application. > Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water). > Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label. Additional Information for using Blue LLC Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other: ^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green ^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue CAUTION: ^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles). ^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and cooling system damage may occur. Exploded View Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Exploded View FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Exploded View Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 3287 CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Page 3680 Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 3925 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. If equipped, remove the front center seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 4. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 586 Page 2193 Attachment General Procedure Locations Page 1851 Rear Window Defogger System Page 2294 Never replace the unit even when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG" at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures. IPDM E/R MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS) Display Control Unit NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Premium With Navigation/Diagnosis System (Audio Unit)/Audio Unit. CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Page 267 Procedures Power Steering Pump: Procedures POWER STEERING OIL PUMP On-Vehicle Inspection and Service CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE CAUTION: Before starting work, confirm belt tension is proper. 1. Connect Tool between oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose and then bleed air from the hydraulic circuit. 2. Start engine. Allow engine to run until tank temperature reaches 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F). CAUTION: - Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in power steering pump increases to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature excessively. - Be careful not to contact hose with belt when engine is started. 3. With engine at idle, close shut-off valve and read the relief oil pressure. Relief oil pressure : 9.0 - 9.8 MPa (91.77 - 99.93 kg/cm2, 1305.34 - 1421.37 psi) CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve of pressure gauge for more than 10 seconds. 4. After measurement, open shut-off valve slowly. If relief oil pressure is outside the specification, disassemble and repair oil pump. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Overhaul. 5. After inspection, disconnect oil pressure gauge and oil pressure gauge adapter from hydraulic circuit, connect oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose. Add fluid and bleed air from hydraulic circuit thoroughly. Refer to See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 5359 2. Release the clips, then remove instrument lower cover RH. White Arrow Indicates Vehicle front 3. Remove lower instrument panel RH and glove box screws. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Exploded View. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove the lower instrument panel RH and glove box. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3747 pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 4. Remove union bolt, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. NOTE: Discard the copper washers, do not reuse. 5. Remove torque member bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Do not drop brake pad. 6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly as shown if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel hub assembly as shown, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in place. CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. 2. Install brake caliper assembly, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Locations Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Locations Page 2687 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 1243 2. Apply the journal diameter grade on the crankshaft front to the column in "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Main Bearings Selection Table". CAUTION: Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection lists for each part. - No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not confuse them. 4. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select. NOTE: Grade list applies to all journals. - Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower. When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder block main bearings housing and the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal. 2. Apply measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. The following steps are same as in "When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used". Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal) Page 1365 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Description The engine oil pressure gauge indicates whether the engine oil pressure is low or normal. The oil pressure gauge is controlled by the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via BCM with the CAN communication line. The oil pressure gauge displays a low or normal indication according to the oil pressure switch signal received via CAN communication. Page 2005 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank Page 4661 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. System Diagram Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 4586 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Blower Motor Resistor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Classification: HA08-006A Reference: NTB09-011A Date: March 10, 2010 BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds and then returns to normal operation. While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off. This condition may be intermittent. AND The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit. ACTION Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the part number is listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812 Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Classification: EM-10-009 Reference: NTB10-094 Date: August 12, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure WARNING: Page 2470 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4132 Concept of auto active test - IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. - The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 4295 Locations Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Locations Shift Indicator: Locations METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location Page 2382 Page 2312 i. Reception item of "IPDM-E": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between IPDM-E and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. 3. Based on information received from "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR", place a check mark on the known good CAN communication line between ECM and IPDM-E. a. Through the previous procedure, the circuit between ADP splice and TCM has the most amount of lines (shade 3-a in the figure below). b. Place a check mark on the known good lines to establish the error circuit. Reception item of "IPDM-E": On "ECM", "OK" is indicated. IPDM-E communicates normally with ECM. Put a check mark on the normal circuit between ECM and IPDM-E (check mark 3-b in the figure below). Component Air Duct: Service and Repair Component DUCTS AND GRILLES Component Ducts - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 821 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 3006 System Diagram Tachometer: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM TACHOMETER : System Diagram Page 193 Page 5273 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 2226 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 5030 Page 2374 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 3228 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 3815 Brake Fluid: Removal and Replacement BRAKE FLUID Drain and Refill CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. - Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. - Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative terminal. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out of the bleed valve. Bleed the air out of the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5581 Page 3527 Control Module: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) - After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 1037 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection ENGINE OIL Inspection OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. - Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. - If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to See: . OIL APPEARANCE Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination. - If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair the broken parts. OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Oil pan - Oil pan drain plug - Oil pressure switch - Oil filter - Oil cooler - Intake valve timing control cover - Intake valve timing control solenoid valve - Front cover - Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head - Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover - Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear) OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. - Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position. 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "Inspection". 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure switch (A). 5. Install Tools. Page 4804 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Pipe HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816 Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Reference: NTB10-030B Date: August 16, 2010 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039 NHTSA# 10V-072 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured out of specification. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this activity. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin. Page 4467 6. If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, inspect steering column. Refer to See: Steering Column/Service and Repair. 7. If steering column meets specification, repair steering gear. CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE When checking front wheel turning angle, refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Page 2810 until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. Page 4875 Page 449 Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Procedures Fuel Filter: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 13 Removal and Replacement Steering Gear: Removal and Replacement POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if steering column is separated from steering gear assembly. Therefore secure steering wheel to avoid turning. REMOVAL 1. Turn wheels to the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 3. Remove undercover using power tool. 4. On 4WD model, remove front final drive, then support drive shafts with wire. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Final Drive M205. 5. Make sure slit of lower joint "A" fits with the projection on rear cover cap "B", while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear cover cap. 6. Remove cotter pin at steering outer socket and discard, then loosen nut. Relay Control System Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System System Diagram RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description Page 1924 Service and Repair Dome Lamp Switch: Service and Repair ILLUMINATION Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal The illumination control switch (1) is replaced as a part of the combination meter assembly. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE B (if equipped) Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens (1). 3. Remove personal lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the connector, then remove personal lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Page 1515 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 233 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 1039 Engine Oil: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL Changing Engine Oil WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. - Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer. CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug : 34.3 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) 7. Refill with new engine oil. Refer to See: . Engine oil capacity (Approximate): CAUTION: The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. Page 4813 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Refrigerant Type...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC 134a (R-134a) Page 497 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor (1) is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser (front grille removed for clarity). 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1656 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 3832 Page 191 Page 4007 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 4372 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 3567 b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not match. c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly. 3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 1181 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection COMPRESSION PRESSURE Checking Compression Pressure 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-III). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. - If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. - If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. - If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. - If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/CAN Communication. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2317 3. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST) of units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit. NOTE: While an error occurred in the past according to SELF-DIAG RESULTS, it is unclear which signal is not received. Assume that errors were detected from all reception items. - Draw a single line among the unit and all reception items. (Work flow differs from CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST).) a. Reception item of "EPS": Assume that the unit could not receive the signals from ECM, ABS, and M&A.; Draw a line among EPS, ECM, ABS, and M&A; (line 3-a in the figure below). b. Reception item of "ABS": Assume that the unit could not receive the signal from ECM. Draw a line between ABS and ECM (line 3-b in the figure below). Page 2214 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 1256 2. Apply the journal diameter grade on the crankshaft front to the column in "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Main Bearings Selection Table". CAUTION: Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection lists for each part. - No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not confuse them. 4. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select. NOTE: Grade list applies to all journals. - Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower. When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder block main bearings housing and the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal. 2. Apply measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. The following steps are same as in "When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used". Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal) Page 986 NOTE: Apply engine coolant to the cap seal. - Replace the reservoir cap if there is any damage in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the limit. CHECKING RADIATOR CAP Inspect the radiator cap. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. - Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. - Pull negative-pressure valve to open it and make sure that it closes completely when released. - Make sure that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator cap negative-pressure valve. - Make sure that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing conditions of negative-pressure valve. Page 299 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 298 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 4602 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Caution HOW TO USE THIS SECTION Caution - This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle, sheets for trouble diagnosis, and inspection procedures. - For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure. Abbreviation List HOW TO USE THIS SECTION Abbreviation List Abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart, and the diagnosis sheet are as per the following list. Interview Sheet DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Interview Sheet Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 107 Page 200 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 1345 b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper). 21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. Page 4459 - Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace the socket. Tool number : - (J-44372) ROTATING TORQUE Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer sockets. AXIAL END PLAY Apply a load of 490 N (50 kg-f, 110 lb-f) to the ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the sockets. ASSEMBLY Page 5887 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 2562 Page 1771 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 1814 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 2467 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 3098 Locations Page 2169 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 4034 Page 904 CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Capacity with reservoir ........................................................................................................................ ............................................. 3-1/4 U.S. Gal. (12.2 L) Page 4058 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change Engine Mount: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change Classification: EM09-008 Reference: NTB10-034 Date: March 1, 2010 2004-2009 ARMADA & TITAN; ENGINE MOUNTING BOLT SIZE CHANGE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) and Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If for any reason one of the Old P/N engines listed in the Parts Information table above needs to be ordered, note that Service Files have or will be created for these engines. Page 5161 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation BCM Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the BCM. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 5306 3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface. - Align the locating pin into the hole in the outer door. - Continue aligning the pins into their corresponding holes in the outer door during installation. 4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface. Apply even pressure along molding to insure proper wet out. CAUTION: To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation. Front Disc Brake Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Exploded View FRONT DISC BRAKE Exploded View of Brake Caliper Removal And Installation FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft Page 1846 With Intelligent Key System Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 2958 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location ABS Page 3048 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 858 - Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. - Steering gear - Steering column - Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Page 1463 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped. 3. Drain engine oil. WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 4. Remove the oil cooler. 5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator. 6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly. 7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool. 8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position aside. 9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. 10. Remove upper radiator hose. 11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator. 12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan. 13. Disconnect the following connectors. - Harness ground - Power steering switch - A/C compressor - Oil pressure switch 14. Remove generator and generator bracket. 15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside. 16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool. 17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only). 18. Remove the steering gear. 19. Remove the oil pressure switch. 20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool. Page 5100 Body Mounting, King Cab Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Body Mounting, King Cab BODY CONSTRUCTION Body Mounting, King Cab When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard............................................................................................................................................... ............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm Minimum............................................................................................................................................... ............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm Differential limit between cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0 Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm Page 2930 b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not match. c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly. 3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 5633 NOTE: In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed, the initial correction may start automatically. Page 4085 Page 5585 Page 5854 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. VDC/TCS/ABS Page 2180 Page 2564 Page 2209 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 6164 7. Disconnect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator and motor assembly. Installation 1. Position the regulator and motor assembly and install the bolts. Regulator and motor assembly : 7.5 N.m (0.76 Kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. 3. Install the rear window. While installing the rear window, make sure that the bottom clips are engaged on the back panel, then rotate the glass into position. - If reusing the existing window assembly, clean the opening and assembly, then apply new butyl to the window assembly. - If installing a new window, clean the opening and remove the plastic liner from the butyl on the new window assembly. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Rear Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4341 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 598 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4198 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS components. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS components. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3065 Page 3057 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Automatic Air Conditioner Control Assembly: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner Control System Diagram AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Control System Diagram CONTROL SYSTEM The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below: Control System Description AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Control System Description CONTROL OPERATION Front air control Page 188 Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Tow Truck Towing Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 4WD MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission. Page 249 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Exploded View Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER FILTER Exploded View Page 1680 A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 3332 Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Drive Shaft SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Drive Shaft Page 2356 Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body Control Module/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the BCM branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. IPDM-E Branch Line Circuit IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R. 2. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the IPDM E/R branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. M&A; Branch Line Circuit M&A; BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of combination meter. 2. Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the combination meter branch line. Locations Page 4111 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 1646 - Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts LH and RH in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts. - A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - White Arrow indicates Front Before installing new air fuel ratio A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using suitable tool and apply anti-seize lubricant. CAUTION: Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 5738 Odometer: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ODO/TRIP METER : Component Description Page 5587 Page 3052 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 2318 4. Search for the possible cause using CAN communication signal chart using information from the interview with the customer. NOTE: For the details of CAN communication signal, refer to See: Application and ID/CAN Communication Signal Chart. a. ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: This means that "ABS warning lamp signal" and "Vehicle speed signal" could not communicate between M&A; and ABS (4-a in the figure below). b. The tachometer moved normally: This means that "Engine speed signal" could communicate normally between ECM and M&A; (4-b in the figure below). Page 1811 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3393 REMOVAL 1. Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake. 2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the rear final drive as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or the companion flange. 3. Remove the center support bearing bracket nuts, and remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Classification: HA08-006A Reference: NTB09-011A Date: March 10, 2010 BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds and then returns to normal operation. While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off. This condition may be intermittent. AND The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit. ACTION Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the part number is listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5159 Page 976 Brake Fluid: Removal and Replacement BRAKE FLUID Drain and Refill CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. - Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. - Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative terminal. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out of the bleed valve. Bleed the air out of the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 3642 Page 1566 engine removal or repair. - The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. - Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. 2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. 3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the cooling system. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695) 5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to See: Maintenance. Cooling system capacity (with reservoir) : Refer to See: Maintenance. 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Page 1831 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 1471 12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) INSTALLATION 1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. 2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed). - Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. 3. Install the front cover as follows: a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block. b. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Page 2476 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Diagram Information and Instructions Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Locations Navigation Module: Locations Locations Page 4083 Terminal Layout IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 1117 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 1782 Page 997 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .............................. Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF* * If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Page 878 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation AIR CLEANER FILTER Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) REMOVAL NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. - Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: . 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 619 Exploded View Thermostat: Service and Repair Exploded View THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Exploded View Page 6188 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. Page 1161 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 459 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. If equipped, remove the front center seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 4. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 3960 Battery: Removal and Replacement BATTERY Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal (1) and positive battery terminal (2). Arrow Indicates : Front CAUTION: Remove negative battery terminal first. 2. Remove the battery cover. 3. Remove the battery clamp bolt (3) and battery clamp. 4. Remove the battery. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing, install the positive battery terminal first. Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to See: Procedures/Special Repair Requirement. Page 2547 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 2765 Use mirrors for checking on hidden points. Page 234 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 837 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 2444 Page 160 Page 5365 REMOVAL CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance. 1. Remove the body side trim. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear trim. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the sun visor assemblies. 4. Remove the sun visor holders. 5. Remove the front roof console (if equipped). Disconnect the harnesses. 6. Remove the rear roof console (if equipped). Disconnect the harnesses. 7. Remove the center roof console (if equipped). Disconnect the harnesses. 8. Remove the assist grips. 9. Remove the striker covers (if equipped). 10. Remove the room lamp. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. System Diagram Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 3965 Alternator: Service and Repair GENERATOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the fan shroud. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Remove lower bracket, using power tools. 5. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools. 6. Remove the generator harness terminal nut connectors. 7. Remove the generator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the generator and check the tension of the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and Inspection. CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully. Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) Page 47 Repair Flow Chart Page 5478 9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for reassembly. Page 5939 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 2308 DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE Identify the root cause using the created diagnosis sheet. Identifying the root cause Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible cause. Narrow the search. NOTE: - Color-code when drawing lines. - Do not draw a line onto a existing line. - Drawing a line is not necessary if the circuit is shorted. Refer to "Present Error -- Short Circuit --", "Past Error -- Short Circuit --". Refer to the following for details of the trouble diagnosis procedure. - "Present Error -- Open Circuit --" - "Present Error -- Short Circuit --" - "Past Error -- Open Circuit --" - "Past Error -- Short Circuit --" NOTE: When the root cause appears to be a branch line or short circuit, be sure to check the control unit as well as the communication line. Present Error -- Open Circuit -- Identify the error circuit using information from the "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" ("ECU list" included). 1. ECU list: Check the items indicated in "ECU list". Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit. NOTE: CAN communication line has no error if units other than Diag on CAN units are not indicated. An error may be on the power supply of the control unit, DDL1 line or DDL2 line. a. "TCM" which is Diag on CAN unit, is not indicated on "ECU list". This indicates that DLC is not receiving a signal from TCM. Draw a line to Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 2248 Page 2184 Page 2118 Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Turn Signal Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 989 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary before installing the vented reservoir cap. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the "MAX" line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Procedures Brake Fluid: Procedures BRAKE FLUID On Board Inspection LEVEL CHECK Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is between MAX and MIN lines as shown. - Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. - If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. - If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake system for fluid leaks. Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2329 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 6) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 6) Page 4787 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair EXPANSION VALVE Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Remove the evaporator. Refer to See: Evaporator Core/Service and Repair . 3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 5597 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 1631 Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal And Installation WATER PUMP Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump. Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below. CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane. - Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. - Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Page 4243 Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair POWER STEERING FLUID Air Bleeding Hydraulic System Incomplete air bleeding causes the following. When this happens, bleed air again. Air bubbles in reservoir tank. - Clicking noise in oil pump. - Excessive buzzing in oil pump. NOTE: When vehicle is stationary or while steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may be heard from oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system. 1. Stop engine, and then turn steering wheel fully to right and left several times. CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and add fluid as needed. 2. Run engine at idle speed. Turn steering wheel fully right and then fully left, hold for about three seconds. Then check for fluid leakage. 3. Repeat step 2 several times at about three second intervals. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. Check for air bubbles or cloudy fluid. 5. If air bubbles or cloudiness still exists, stop engine, perform steps 2 and 3 again until air bubbles or cloudiness does not exist. 6. Stop engine, check fluid level. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 3093 Page 1349 Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Page 608 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Locations Page 1710 Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest) Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out from square hole (A). 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing. Page 2800 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position. NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 5454 7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate. 8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3. Page 3483 8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 13. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 4683 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 2986 8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 13. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Page 4069 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System System Diagram SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Diagram System Description SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System Description. Page 1618 Thermostat: Service and Repair Removal And Installation THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation REMOVAL Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat. Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe. Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove the water cut valve. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the thread. - Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. - After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. INSTALLATION Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4189 Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX DVD Player Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 4161 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 1239 Locations Page 3236 A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Page 5110 Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair - Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab. 2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab. 2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear door tweeter connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1460 Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover Page 176 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 2126 Page 2899 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 675 Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Page 3406 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Propeller Shaft 3S1410 PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool Page 644 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Locations Page 3377 Page 2314 Present Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause. Error symptom Most the units connected to the CAN communication system go into fail-safe mode or are deactivated. Inspection procedure - Refer to "MALFUNCTION AREA CHART". Page 1366 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Description Page 1818 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Locations Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 131 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Page 4265 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 4226 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System System Diagram POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Description OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. - IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication. Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active. - CAN transmission is stopped. SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION - IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication. - Front wiper fail-safe operation - Outputting signals to actuators - Switches or relays operating - Auto active test is starting - Emergency OFF - Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication. - IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled. WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start. - Ignition switch ON - An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication. Procedures Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 2025 CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Exploded View Camshaft: Service and Repair Exploded View CAMSHAFT Exploded View Locations Page 3100 Page 4506 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 6098 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5571 System Diagram Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM FUEL GAUGE : System Diagram Page 854 Ride Height Exploded View Water Pump: Service and Repair Exploded View WATER PUMP Exploded View Page 1000 9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. Page 3379 Page 4575 - Shock absorber mounting insulator (1) - Arrow Indicates: Flat tail 2. Install upper spring insulator (3) with studs located in line with lower shock mount and in lower seat step (2). The lower seat step (2) in the shock absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle. - Arrow Indicates: Front 3. Tighten the piston rod lock nut to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension . Use a new piston rod lock nut for assembly. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 2348 - Combination meter 4. Check the continuity between the data link connector and the combination meter harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the data link connector and the combination meter. NO - Repair the main line between the data link connector and the combination meter. Main Line Between M&A; And ABS Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN M&A; AND ABS CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector M31 - Harness connector E152 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness connectors. Combination meter - Harness connectors M31 and E152 2. Check the continuity between the combination meter harness connector and the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the combination meter and the harness connector M31. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 2. Check the continuity between the harness connector and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Models without VDC - Models with VDC Page 311 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Locations Page 1196 Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Remove the chain tensioner (RH) using the following steps. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the chain tensioner body. b. Secure plunger using stopper pin. - Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and the chain tensioner (RH) (A). NOTE: If it is difficult to push plunger on chain tensioner (RH) (A), remove the plunger under extended condition. 8. Loosen camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft with timing chain disconnected. Page 4693 Blower Motor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation Blower Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1948 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 396 Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Locations Locations Page 5255 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 4118 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4 Page 5536 Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 - Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 - 10A fuse - Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace ASCD brake switch. 7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 9. NG - GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 - Fuse block (J/B) connector M60 - 10A fuse - Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Locations Page 4241 Locations Locations Tachometer: Locations METER SYSTEM TACHOMETER : Component Parts Location Page 130 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION - IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. - IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. - If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times. NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays "Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. Page 5577 Page 1470 8. Remove access cover 9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft. Tool number: ( - ) J47245 a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool. - Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in). 10. Remove the front cover. a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. Page 2462 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 3336 Axle Shaft Assembly: Vehicle Damage Warnings PRECAUTIONS Precaution Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing the wheel hub and drive shafts. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. - Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. - Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the component parts. - Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. - Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. - Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with a suitable solvent which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 5614 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. NO - Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Inspection COLUMN SHIFT 1.CHECK KEY SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect key switch connector. 3. Check continuity between key switch terminals 3 and 4. Page 5964 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP Bulb Replacement CAUTION: Turn headlamp switch OFF before disconnecting headlamp harness connector. - Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. - Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to replace it with a new one. HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM Removal 1. Position fender protector aside. 2. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 3. Disconnect headlamp electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb . Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect headlamp electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP (FRONT) NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. Removal 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock. 2. Pull the bulb to remove from the socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SIDE MARKER LAMP (FRONT) Removal NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. 1. Turn the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket counterclockwise and remove side marker lamp (front) bulb socket. 2. Pull to remove side marker lamp (front) from the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4380 Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 3934 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 4874 Page 2497 Page 943 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. Page 3805 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake Exploded View REAR DISC BRAKE Exploded View of Brake Caliper Removal And Installation REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: - While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. - Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Page 1756 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 3211 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 2219 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Locations Page 818 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1543 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine room cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 4803 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible Hose HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation . 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 1947 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 2280 NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted. Page 912 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 4285 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Page 4288 Concept of auto active test - IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. - The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 5464 ^ 2 top tabs ^ 2 side tabs ^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips listed in the Parts Information table). a. Lift up and pull bottom of seat back board away from seat back. See Figure 5. b. Lift the middle part of the seat back board up and pull away from the seat back. c. Slide the top part of the seat back board down, then pull away from the seat back. 7. Install seat back board: a. Starting at the top place tabs underneath seat back frame and apply pressure until it is securely in place. b. Install 2 new clips on the bottom part of the seat back board, then align bottom clips with holes in seat back frame until it clicks into place. See Parts Information table. c. Apply pressure to both sides of the seat back board until the tabs click into place. Disclaimer Page 189 Page 5804 Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Locations Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 1122 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Service and Repair Tailgate: Service and Repair TAIL GATE Removal and Installation GAS STAY Removal WARNING: The gas stay is under high pressure. Remove the gas stay only with the tailgate fully closed. Injury may result if the gas stay is removed when the tailgate is open. 1. Remove the RH rear combination lamp assembly. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Marker Lamp/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the gas stay. Page 5596 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Light Reminder Warning Chime System Diagram WARNING CHIME SYSTEM LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Diagram System Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description DESCRIPTION With ignition switch in OFF or ACC position, driver door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, the light warning chime will sound. BCM detects ignition switch in OFF or ACC position, front door switch LH ON, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position. And then transmits buzzer output signal (light reminder warning chime) to combination meter with CAN communication line. - When combination meter receives buzzer output signal (light reminder warning chime), it sounds the buzzer. WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS If all of the following conditions are fulfilled Lighting switch is at 1st or 2nd position - Ignition switch is at OFF or ACC - Front door switch LH is ON WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled. Lighting switch OFF - Ignition switch ON - Front door switch LH is OFF Component Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Component Description Page 3651 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 1839 Page 2198 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2 Page 620 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 4041 HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc. - Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors. - Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection. CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals. Page 1718 Page 4206 Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4211 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminal And Reference Value ECM ECM Terminal and Reference Value PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake/Exploded View (front disc brake), See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake/Exploded View (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. Locations Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4293 Terminal Layout IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 4063 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 3748 CAUTION: Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and caliper assembly, bolts, and washer. 3. Install brake hose to brake caliper assembly using new copper washers. Align the brake hose to the projection as shown and tighten union bolts to the specified torque. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 5. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install front wheel and tires. Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly Page 347 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 3833 Procedures Fuel Filter: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 4508 PARTS INFORMATION Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminal And Reference Value ECM ECM Terminal and Reference Value PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 326 Page 569 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 2600 Page 1586 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Premium With Navigation DVD Player: Testing and Inspection Premium With Navigation DVD PLAYER Reference Value PHYSICAL VALUES Page 3785 hold it in place. CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. 2. Install brake caliper assembly, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and caliper assembly, bolts, and washer. 3. Install brake hose to brake caliper assembly using new copper washers. Align the brake hose to the projection as shown and tighten union bolts to the specified torque. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 5. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install front wheel and tires. Page 1906 Page 3296 2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Rear Final Drive M226 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it. 2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Page 3303 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Belt. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) Page 5053 Page 725 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 4595 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket Page 2092 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket Page 2757 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 2506 Page 4654 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct. Grilles DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panels as necessary. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH and LH Side Demister Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH and LH Ventilator Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Center Ventilator Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. Page 5480 12. Remove and replace the switch. 13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan. 14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto the seat frame. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9. WARNING: Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. 15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs. 16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8 Kg-m, 20 ft-lb). 17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan. 18. Re-attach the lower flap cover. Page 3450 REPAIR FLOW CHART Service and Repair Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle AXLE BEARING Removal and Installation The axle oil seal and bearing ring retainer must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. Refer to See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 4115 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Wiring Diagram IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1 Page 476 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 10. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace stop lamp switch. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. INSPECTION END Page 5302 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3996 Starter Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Service and Repair Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly to replace the seat cushion. Locations Page 174 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION IN-Vehicle Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the in-vehicle sensor (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 663 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 3169 4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover. ASSEMBLY 1. Install new O-ring to oil pump cover. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply ATF to O-ring. 2. Install new O-ring to oil pump housing. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply ATF to O-ring. 3. Install new oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump housing until it is flush with the face of oil pump housing using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. Page 643 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 1746 Locations Page 4012 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram Power Socket - Part 1 Page 4349 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 1232 2. Apply the journal diameter grade on the crankshaft front to the column in "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Main Bearings Selection Table". CAUTION: Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection lists for each part. - No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not confuse them. 4. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select. NOTE: Grade list applies to all journals. - Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower. When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder block main bearings housing and the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal. 2. Apply measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. The following steps are same as in "When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used". Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal) Page 199 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 4070 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System System Diagram POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Description OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. - IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication. Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active. - CAN transmission is stopped. SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION - IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication. - Front wiper fail-safe operation - Outputting signals to actuators - Switches or relays operating - Auto active test is starting - Emergency OFF - Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication. - IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled. WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start. - Ignition switch ON - An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication. Page 3017 Locations Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 2353 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 2. Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals. Models without VDC - Models with VDC Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. Models with ABS: See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/C Code Charts/C1109/ABS - Models with ABLS: See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/C Code Charts/C1109/ABLS/ABS - Models with VDC: See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/C Code Charts/C1109/VDC/TCS/ABS Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. Models with ABS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/ABS - Models with ABLS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/ABLS/ABS - Models with VDC: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Branch Line MALFUNCTION AREA CHART Branch Line Main Line Page 3975 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1728 Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1432 Timing Chain: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TIMING CHAIN Removal and Installation NOTE: - To remove timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The procedure for removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for removal on the LH bank. - To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure for installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the RH bank. REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the following components and related parts: Drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. - Thermostat housing and water hose. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant Outlet/Service and Repair/Water Outlet and Water Piping. - Power steering oil pump bracket. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. - Oil pan (lower), (upper) and oil strainer. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. - Ignition coil. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. - Rocker cover. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 4. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Page 6034 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Component. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 3. Remove the column cover upper and lower. 4. Remove wiper washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. 5. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from base. Front Seat Belt Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt CREW CAB KING CAB Page 2145 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Inspection Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Inspection TRANSFER FLUID Inspection CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: Maintenance. FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer assembly or around it. 2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. 3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "Inspection". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 467 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 175 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Page 3989 Starter Motor: Description and Operation System Description STARTING SYSTEM System Description The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. Page 161 Defroster Door Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defroster Door Motor DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Defroster Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the audio amplifier, if equipped. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Premium With Navigation . 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2713 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation AIR CLEANER FILTER Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) REMOVAL NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. - Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: Maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 1456 EM-8 Page 4531 ^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Locations Page 320 Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 4995 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. System Diagram Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram Page 1393 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Description Page 3749 DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. Page 2743 Use mirrors for checking on hidden points. Page 6163 - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. 3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the rear window in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal 1. Remove the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the sealing screen. 3. Lower the window and remove the rear window glass bolts. 4. Raise the window and hold it in place with tape. 5. Disconnect the rear window defogger harness connector. 6. Remove the rear window glass assembly. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 4355 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 2604 Knock Sensor: Locations Page 3297 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD) Changing Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly. 2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified level near the filler plug hole. Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it. Page 3884 Repair Flow Chart Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 1794 Page 540 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 1125 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 5366 11. Remove the headlining. - Disconnect the harnesses. 12. Remove the rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect the harness. 13. Remove the lamp assemblies from roof console. - Disconnect the harnesses. 14. Remove the rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove the center roof console front bracket (if equipped). 16. Remove the assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3348 and serration hole. Refer to See: Maintenance . After inserting the grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off the grease that has oozed out. 2. Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the boot band and boot onto the shaft. Do not damage the boot. NOTE: Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for assembly. 3. Remove the protective tape wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft. 4. Attach the circlip to the drive shaft making sure circlip fits securely into groove on drive shaft. Then install drive shaft nut to end of joint sub-assembly, and press-fit the circlip using a suitable tool as shown. NOTE: Discard the old circlip and use a new one for assembly. 5. Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly and the large end of the boot. Refer to See: Maintenance . Grease capacity : 145 - 165 g (5.11 - 5.82 oz) 6. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by the * marks) as shown. Page 4165 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 3094 Page 5283 - Disconnect the harness connector. 9. Remove the door finisher and disconnect the lock cable and handle cable from the inside door handle assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation". 10. Remove the door lock knob. 11. Remove the inside door handle assembly screws and remove the inside door handle assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR - CREW CAB Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly. Disconnect the harness connector. 2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove the pull handle escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screws behind armrest. 6. Remove the step lamp (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector. 7. Remove the door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from the door handle assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear door tweeter speaker connector. Page 3737 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the brake pedal. - Check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward. - After installing the brake pedal assembly, be sure to adjust it. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, See: Testing and Inspection/Adjustable Pedal. Page 5387 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 4944 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt REMOVAL 1. Remove rear kicking plates. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove rear seat assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove seat belt D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 4. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt. 5. Remove lower side finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. Page 1572 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Installation of Thermostat Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber ring as shown. - Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings, then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation holes. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Page 2275 Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings Precaution For Trouble Diagnosis PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis CAUTION: Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. - Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less. - Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when checking the harness. Precaution For Harness Repair PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Harness Repair - Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in). - Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area. NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost. Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line. Precaution For Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "Air Bag" And "Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner" PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: Page 5051 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2488 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 5706 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 2034 - No. 1 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with white arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 5617 Page 1276 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Removal And Installation ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation (for LH only). 3. Move the harness on the upper rocker cover and its peripheral aside. 4. Remove the electric throttle control actuator, loosening the bolts diagonally (for LH only). 5. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 6. Remove the PCV hose from the PCV control valves. 7. Loosen the rocker cover bolts in reverse order as shown using power tool. CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck. Arrow indicates Engine front - A: Rocker cover LH - B: Rocker cover RH 8. Remove the rocker cover. INSTALLATION 1. Apply liquid gasket to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps below. NOTE: Illustration shows an example of (LH) side (zoomed in shows No.1 camshaft bracket). a. Use illustration "a" to apply liquid gasket to the joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. b. Use illustration "b" to apply liquid gasket 90° to illustration "a". Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Turn Signal Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 822 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 4603 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 4610 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 5946 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 1591 Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 2138 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1801 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 2006 until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. Page 4221 Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Side Curtain Air Bag Module Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Curtain Air Bag Module SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). - Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect side curtain air bag module connector. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag module. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair. - After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 2107 Locations Page 5853 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Service and Repair Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the sonar control unit. Sonar control unit (king cab) (1) - Sonar control unit (crew cab) (2) 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the two bolts and remove the sonar control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Mud Flap: Service and Repair MUDGUARD Removal and Installation NOTE: Crew Cab shown King Cab similar. Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Tail Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 775 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Power Window Switch FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front power window switch assembly from the front door finisher RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front power window switch (1) from the power window switch finisher (2) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Evaporator Core: Service and Repair EVAPORATOR Removal and Installation for Evaporator Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater core. Refer to See: Heater Core/Service and Repair . 2. Remove the defroster mode door arm. 3. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case. Page 4611 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 1578 Radiator Cooling Fan: Service and Repair Removal And Installation ENGINE COOLING FAN Removal and Installation (Crankshaft Driven Type) REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the lower radiator shroud. Refer to See: Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the cooling fan. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Fan Coupling Inspect fan coupling for oil leakage and bimetal conditions. Fan Bracket Visually check that there is no significant looseness in the fan bracket shaft, and that it turns smoothly by hand. - If there are any unusual concerns, replace the cooling fan pulley. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install cooling fan with its front mark "F" facing front of engine. Refer to "Removal and Installation (Crankshaft Driven Type)". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no leaks of the engine coolant. Page 4076 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness. Page 2532 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2228 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2111 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Fog/Driving Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 4296 Page 2455 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Blower Motor Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High Classification: HA08-006A Reference: NTB09-011A Date: March 10, 2010 BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds and then returns to normal operation. While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off. This condition may be intermittent. AND The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit. ACTION Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the part number is listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3221 Shifter A/T: Removal and Replacement SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation Floor shift models Column shift models Locations Speedometer Module: Locations METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Component Description Starter Motor: Description and Operation Component Description STARTING SYSTEM Component Description Page 2349 Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the combination meter and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector E152 and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). DIFF Branch Line Circuit DIFF BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of differential lock control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the differential lock control unit harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the differential lock control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the differential lock control unit. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1833. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the differential lock control unit. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Differential/Control Unit/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the differential lock control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. ADP Branch Line Circuit ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Driver seat control unit - Harness connector B200 - Harness connector B37 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Classification: BR10-005 Reference: NTB10-081 Date: June 25, 2010 2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body or brake pads, ACTION: Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service. NOTE: The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed brake pad removal procedures. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially drain the brake fluid. ^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual. 2. Remove the front wheels. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal. Page 746 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 5995 Marker Lamp: Service and Repair Removal And Installation REAR COMBINATION LAMP Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove rear combination lamp bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. System Diagram Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram Page 1871 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 3401 ASSEMBLY Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 3S1410/Snap Ring. NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 3S1410/General Specification. Center Support Bearing 1. Apply a thin coat of multi-purpose grease to both the propeller shaft tube and the inside surface of the center support bearing. Page 2304 CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interview sheet. Interview Sheet (Example) Page 4051 With Intelligent Key System Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 803 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 1833 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 4082 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Reference Value IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Reference Value VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Page 6074 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1383 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Removal and Installation INTAKE MANIFOLD Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine coolant when the engine is hot. 2. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. 4. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube quick connector on the engine side. Perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector using Tool. Tool number : 16441 6N210 (J-45488) a. Remove quick connector cap (engine side only). b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool in that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Page 1137 Wheels: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Page 3237 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Inspection A/T FLUID COOLER Inspection After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Page 2186 Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Page 3467 Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 4509 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2292 Combination Meter Transfer Control Unit NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG". Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Classification: EL07-038B Reference: NTB08-039B Date: January 19, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only IF YOU CONFIRM The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch. WARNING: ^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip of the seat bottom cover. ^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. ^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure Page 4872 Page 3096 Page 1127 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Locations Page 4458 Steering Gear: Overhaul POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Disassembly and Assembly CAUTION: Secure steering gear assembly with a vise, using copper plates or something similar to prevent it from being damaged. Do not grip cylinder with a vise. - Before performing disassembly, clean steering gear assembly with kerosene. Be careful not to bring any kerosene into contact with the discharge and return port connectors. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly. 2. Loosen lock nuts of outer sockets, and remove outer sockets. 3. Remove boot clamps of the small diameter side and the large diameter side, then remove boot. CAUTION: When removing boots, be careful not to damage inner socket and gear housing assembly. If they are damaged, change them to avoid oil leaks. 4. Remove inner sockets. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary. Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as an assembly if necessary. Outer Socket and Inner Socket SWING TORQUE Page 6158 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Power Window Switch Rear Door Switch REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation - Rear Door Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear power window switch assembly from the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear power window switch (2) from the power window switch finisher (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Power Drop Glass Switch REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation - Power Drop Glass Switch REMOVAL 1. Release the pawls and remove the overhead console switch panel (1) from the overhead console (2). 2. Disconnect the power drop glass switch (3). 3. Remove the power drop glass switch (3) from the overhead console switch panel (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool. CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2452 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 2435 Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information Technical Service Bulletin # 09-025 Date: 090325 Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information Classification: BT09-007 Reference: NTB09-025 Date: March 25, 2009 FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front seat belt buckle needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Route the replacement buckle harness as shown in the SERVICE PROCEDURE below. NOTE: The routing of the replacement buckle wiring harness is different than the original. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Service Procedure FRONT LH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). ^ Wait at least 3 minutes after battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any SRS components. 3. Remove LH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM for removal procedure. Page 1206 Camshaft: Service and Repair Inspection CAMSHAFT Inspection after Installation INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE WARNING: Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil. CAUTION: Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT-III and it is directed according to inspection procedure of Engine Control System. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0011. 1. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking. a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors if practical. 3. Remove IVT control solenoid valve. 4. Crank engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from IVT control cover oil hole. End cranking after checking. WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.). CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from IVT control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to prevent engine oil from splashing on worker, engine components and vehicle. - Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belts or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil. 5. Clean oil groove between oil strainer and IVT control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from IVT control valve cover oil hole. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Diagrams/Schematic. 6. Remove components between IVT control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check each oil groove for clogging. Clean oil groove if necessary. 7. After inspection, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2272 CAN System - Part 7 Page 3110 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 2906 Knock Sensor: Locations Page 2264 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 274 Service and Repair Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the four screws (A) securing the front air control unit (1) to cluster lid D (2). 4. Remove the front air control unit (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5235 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Page 5221 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Page 3601 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Belt. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) Service and Repair Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair BODY CONSTRUCTION Foam Repair During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. FILL PROCEDURES 1. Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Install service part. - Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. 2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. Page 5598 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Seat Belt Warning Chime System Diagram WARNING CHIME SYSTEM SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Diagram System Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description DESCRIPTION With ignition switch turned ON and driver seat belt unfastened, seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch signal from combination meter with CAN communication line. - BCM detects ignition switch turned ON and seat belt buckle switch LH ON. And then transmits buzzer output signal (seat belt warning chime) to combination meter with CAN communication line. - When combination meter receives buzzer output signal (seat belt warning chime), it sounds the buzzer. WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS If all of the following conditions are fulfilled Ignition switch OFF to ON - Seat belt buckle switch LH is ON (driver seat belt not fastened) WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS Cancels the warning if any of the following conditions is fulfilled. Ignition switch OFF - Seat belt buckle switch LH is OFF (driver seat belt fastened) Component Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Component Description Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 2434 Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 1852 Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Procedure After Replacing ECM INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Procedure After Replacing ECM When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. 2. Perform See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. 4. Perform See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning. VIN Registration INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Page 3887 Page 1436 NOTE: - The above figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that of the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. - To install the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure for installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the RH bank. 1. Make sure the crankshaft key and camshaft dowel pin RH bank and camshaft dowel pin LH bank are facing in the direction shown. 2. Install the camshaft sprockets. Page 1384 Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. d. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube. CAUTION: - Pull quick connector holding "A" position in illustration. Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. - Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. - Avoid fire and sparks. - Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. 6. Remove or disconnect harnesses, brackets, vacuum hose, vacuum gallery and PCV hose and tube from intake manifold. 7. Remove electric throttle control actuator by loosening bolts diagonally. CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any damage to the electric throttle control actuator. - Do not disassemble. 8. Remove the fuel injectors and fuel tube assembly. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 9. Loosen the bolts in reverse order shown using power tool. 10. Remove the intake manifold. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. Clean all gasket mating surfaces, do not reuse gaskets. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown. - Install the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve connector with it facing front of engine. - Tighten the electronic throttle control actuator bolts of the electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps. - After installation perform inspection after installation. - Install the water hose so that its overlap width for connection is between 27 mm (1.06 in) and 32 mm (1.26 in) (target: 27 mm 1.06 in). Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube Install quick connector as follows (the steps are the same for quick connectors on both engine side and vehicle side except for the quick connector cap). 1. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around tube and quick connector, and they are not damaged. 2. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube from tip end to the spool end. Page 4197 HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc. - Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors. - Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection. CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals. Page 842 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Page 3807 3. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to specification. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires. Disassembly and Assembly REAR DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. Page 913 - No. 1 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with white arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 1669 WARNING: Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 451 Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 2749 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 3117 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2106 Page 2259 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 5195 8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), and separate the door lock assembly from the door. 9. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the front of the vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly as shown. 10. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. 11. Separate the outside handle cable connection (1) from the outside handle bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install the key cylinder rod, be sure to rotate the key cylinder rod holder until a click is felt. Page 2769 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Page 1486 Page 4350 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cowl top seal. Release the plastics clips on the cowl top seal which go through the cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension. 3. Remove the cowl top covers LH and RH. Release the plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge. - Disconnect the washer tubes from washer nozzles. 4. Remove the cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect the wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH. - Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of the wiper motor and connecting rod assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect the windshield washer tube. Refer to See: Diagrams/Mechanical Diagrams/Windshield Washer Hose. 7. Remove the A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Low-Pressure Pipe. 8. Remove the drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove the cowl top extension. INSTALLATION Page 4266 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Automatic Air Conditioner Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Component Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 4340 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Exploded View Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exploded View EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Exploded View Page 4838 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 187 Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Shackle: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3988 Starter Motor: Description and Operation System Diagram STARTING SYSTEM System Diagram Front Disc Brake Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front Disc Brake Front Disc Brake Page 3730 Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3. With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until threaded ends contact the brake pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap (C) is within specifications. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 4060 Page 4264 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Procedures Fuel Filter: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 5176 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PLASTIC BUMPER Removal 1. Remove the front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the skid plate or front under cover. 3. Remove the fog lamp, if equipped. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Fog/Driving Lamp/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 4. Remove the screws and fasteners and remove the plastic fascia assembly. Remove the fog lamp opening finisher, if equipped, from the plastic fascia assembly. 5. Remove the clips and energy absorber from the retainer bracket. 6. Remove the retainer bracket. 7. Remove the front bumper brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove the front bumper stays LH and RH. Specifications Alternator: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Generator With Intelligent Key System Starter Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 1667 ^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above. Page 1339 EM-12 Page 5582 Locations VDC/TCS/ABS Page 3774 5. Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires. Page 4291 Locations Page 3310 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410 (2S1410) or See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410 (3S1410). 2. Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 3. Measure the total preload torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. NOTE: Record the total preload torque measurement. 4. Remove the drive pinion nut using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( - ) 5. Put matching marks on the companion flange and drive pinion using paint. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching marks. Do not damage the companion flange or drive pinion. 6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) Locations Page 5220 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. Page 4537 ^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 276 Attachment General Procedure Page 558 Page 284 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Service and Repair Rear Bumper: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tow hitch to service the rear bumper. 1. Disconnect the harness from tow hitch, if equipped. 2. Remove the bolts on each side of tow hitch and remove the tow hitch, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the sonar sensor harness connector, if equipped. Disconnect the sonar sensors from retainers. 4. Disconnect the license lamp harness. 5. Remove the clips from the license lamps and remove lamps. 6. Release the clips and remove the upper step pads. 7. Remove the rear bumper. Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair AXLE OIL SEAL Removal and Installation The axle oil seal and bearing ring retainer must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. Refer to See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 5963 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Locations Page 5807 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 1845 Page 3731 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Adjustable Pedal BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment - Adjustable Pedal INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to the floor as shown. Tool number : - (J-46532) 2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forward most (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning them 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten the lock nut (A) to specification. Page 5609 METER BUZZER CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF COMBINATION METER Check power supply of combination meter. Refer to See: Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Combination Meter. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair power supply circuit of combination meter. Component Function Check SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Function Check 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL Select "DATA MONITOR" for "METER/M&A;" and check the "SEAT BELT W/L" monitor value. - Inspection End. Diagnosis Procedure SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Description Transmits a seat belt buckle switch signal to the combination meter. SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 27 and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. NO - GO TO 2 2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cowl top seal. Release the plastics clips on the cowl top seal which go through the cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension. 3. Remove the cowl top covers LH and RH. Release the plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge. - Disconnect the washer tubes from washer nozzles. 4. Remove the cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect the wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH. - Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of the wiper motor and connecting rod assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect the windshield washer tube. Refer to See: Diagrams/Mechanical Diagrams/Windshield Washer Hose. 7. Remove the A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Low-Pressure Pipe. 8. Remove the drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove the cowl top extension. INSTALLATION Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Parking Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 76 Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : System Description The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 5564 Page 3756 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert in to groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder body inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Apply rubber grease to sliding sleeves, then install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body. Page 2154 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 5879 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 2350 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the driver seat control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Driver Seat Control Unit See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Memory Positioning Module/Service and Repair/Driver Seat Control Unit. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. DISP Branch Line Circuit DISP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of display control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the display control unit harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the display control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Premium With Navigation/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Display Control Unit. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation System/Service and Repair/Display Unit YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the display control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. HVAC Branch Line Circuit HVAC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure Page 310 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 5795 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 1198 3. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading). Camshaft runout : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) - If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Cam Height Measure the camshaft cam height. - If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Journal Clearance Camshaft Journal Diameter Measure the diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard diameter : 25.950 - 25.970 mm (1.0217 - 1.0224 in) Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque. - Measure the inner diameter (A) of the camshaft bracket. Page 2780 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 5674 Fuel Gauge: Locations METER SYSTEM FUEL GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 2666 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair EVAP CANISTER Removal and Installation EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Page 3032 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Locations System Diagram Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 3323 CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Locations Procedures Shifter A/T: Procedures SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Checking of A/T Position NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers. 1. Place selector lever in "P" position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure selector lever can be shifted to other than "P" position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make sure selector lever can be shifted from "P" position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the transmission body. 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown. 6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the "R" position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against "R" position in the "P" or "N" position. 7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. 8. Make sure transmission is locked completely in "P" position. Page 2270 CAN System - Part 5 Premium Without Navigation DVD Player: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Removal and Installation DVD PLAYER Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the center console bin. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 3. Remove the DVD player screws. 4. Remove the DVD player. Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. VIDEO MONITOR Removal 1. Remove the rear roof console assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector. 3. Remove the video housing screws. 4. Remove the video monitor and housing. 5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor. Page 1984 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. Page 115 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2339 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 16) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 16) Page 5926 2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens. 3. Release the personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove. Personal lamp bulb (type B) : 12V - 6W CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped) Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the room/map lamp assembly (2). Refer to See: Courtesy Lamp/Service and Repair. Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from room/map lamp assembly (2) to remove. Page 2646 Page 4691 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM System Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Blower speed control system components are: Front air control - Variable blower control - Front blower motor relay - Front blower motor - Ambient sensor - Intake sensor System Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). Page 1763 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 5036 DVD Player: Testing and Inspection Premium Without Navigation DVD PLAYER Reference Value PHYSICAL VALUES Page 3933 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 3753 REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut. 3. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body. NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse. 5. Remove sliding pin bolts (1) as shown, and remove cylinder body (2). 6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel hub assembly, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in place. CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. 2. Install cylinder body (2) and tighten sliding pin bolts (1) to specification. CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. Page 2285 Page 3033 Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-004 Reference: NTB09-071 Date: August 4, 2009 TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) with V8 engine. IF YOU CONFIRM The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason; ACTION: Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin. CAUTION ^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs. CLAIMS INFORMATION Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Page 3803 4. Remove piston seals from cylinder body, using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. - Do not reuse piston seals. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to new piston seals and insert seals into grooves on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seals. Page 2224 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Locations Page 1702 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 896 Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Page 1440 CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 13. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. - Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt. - Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch, put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. 14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 15. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to the fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at the connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 1051 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Checking of Refrigerant Leaks PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Page 3007 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 614 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations With Intelligent Key System Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 4054 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4134 Monitor item ACTIVE TEST Test item Page 5947 Fog/Driving Lamp: Locations FRONT FOG LAMP Component Parts Location Page 4432 CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washers. 2. Remove the suction pipe and O-ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. 3. Remove the pulley nut and pulley. 4. Remove the bracket bolts and bracket. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Body Assembly Inspection Check the power steering oil pump body assembly for damage. If any damage is found, replace with a new power steering oil pump assembly. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper gaskets - Do not reuse the O-ring. Apply a coat of Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent to the O-ring. Page 184 Page 5938 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5780 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 4814 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Checking of Refrigerant Leaks PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Page 5348 Console: Overhaul Exploded View CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Exploded View Page 4343 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 2340 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 17) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 17) Page 4104 Page 5479 10. Remove the outboard J-Clip. WARNING: Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. 11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly. Page 4260 Page 4358 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 5074 Page 5052 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1459 EM-12 Page 4490 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 1644 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Removal And Installation EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove the engine undercover (rear) using power tool (4WD models). 2. Remove front final drive assembly (4WD models). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Final Drive M205. 3. Remove the main muffler assembly and center exhaust tube. . 4. Remove the front exhaust tubes. . 5. Remove front tires. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair. 6. Remove fender protectors. See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 7. Remove the LH and RH air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both LH and RH exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number : - (J-44626) CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors - Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. 8. Support the engine using a suitable tool. 9. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front - B: Exhaust manifold (RH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as shown using power tool. e. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A). Page 4146 Page 4587 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake/Exploded View (front disc brake), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake/Exploded View (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. Page 1060 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated Refrigerant. 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated Refrigerant. 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) Page 3295 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Differential Gear Oil Changing Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly. 2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified level near the filler plug hole. Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Front Final Drive M205 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not leaking from the front final drive assembly or around it. Page 65 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Page 5124 Locations Page 542 Page 3015 Page 900 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Page 4242 Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Maintenance Item Programing Page 5455 9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for reassembly. Specifications Steering Wheel: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Wheel Page 1231 Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table. Undersize Bearings Usage Guide When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use undersize (US) bearings. - When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with the bearing installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Bearing undersize table CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft pins). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the main bearing housing grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block to the row in "Main Bearings Selection Table". Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 2364 Locations Page 5608 Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness. Component Function Check METER BUZZER CIRCUIT Component Function Check 1.CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER 1. Select "BUZZER" of "BCM" on CONSULT-III. 2. Perform "LIGHT WARN ALM" of "ACTIVE TEST". Does meter buzzer activate? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Diagnosis Procedure METER BUZZER CIRCUIT Description - The buzzer for warning chime system is installed in the combination meter. - The combination meter sounds the alarm buzzer based on the signals transmitted from various units. Page 2725 until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. Page 1094 Page 4682 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 2694 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the frontmost position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 1346 23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. Page 5692 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 3456 Page 5693 Page 3255 Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A). 4. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip (Arrow). 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check the fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2 Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 5535 Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 7. 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Page 5846 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Page 4219 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3 Page 2987 2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to specification. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Exploded View Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Exploded View Page 5984 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 183 Page 3385 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Propeller Shaft 3S1410 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Specifications Accelerator Pedal: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Accelerator Control ACCELERATOR PEDAL STROKE AND TRAVEL Page 5212 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 2007 - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 5558 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 2396 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation BCM Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the BCM. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster grille from the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 2473 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 1567 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary before installing the vented reservoir cap. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the "MAX" line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Page 5106 Speaker: Service and Repair MID Audio Front Tweeter FRONT TWEETER Removal and Installation FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove the front tweeter (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Door Speaker FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and remove the front door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door Speaker REAR DOOR SPEAKER Page 3971 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 1452 EM-4 Power Consumption Control System Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 4485 Lot Number Locations. Page 4797 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. 5. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. System Diagram Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Locations Page 2502 A/T Shift Lock System Page 5689 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 224 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 2042 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 6198 ^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less than 1 mm in diameter. NOTE: A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the crack "branches out". Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass. ^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty. 2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface. Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone, and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on the same scale). Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily scratched by: ^ Fine sand particles ^ Hard metal ^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry Page 138 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Reference Value IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Reference Value VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Locations Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 5907 Page 801 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Locations Page 2155 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 3846 CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Replacement BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. - Before removing brake master cylinder, depress the brake pedal 5-6 times with the key OFF to deplete vacuum in the booster. 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Disconnect harness connector for fluid level sensor. 3. If equipped, disconnect harness connectors for front and rear pressure sensors. 4. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 5. Remove master cylinder assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. - Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. - Adjust brake pedal. Refer to See: Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal. Page 2882 Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Locations Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 857 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B". Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/System Specifications/Steering Outer Socket And Inner Socket c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Lock nut : Refer See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Overhaul FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment Page 1254 Piston Selection Table NOTE: The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. - The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available). HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 2. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 4. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table" to select. When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inside diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. The following steps are the same as in "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used". Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table Page 5625 Page 1332 EM-4 Locations Page 2785 Page 3049 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3744 IMPORTANT: If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform. Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair OIL FILTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. - When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. - Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. - Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter : 17.7 N.m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) 4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. Refer to "Removal and Installation". 5. Install the engine front undercover. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb) Page 5731 Page 2515 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 3855 Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake Control SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Brake Control Page 5589 Page 2225 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 3485 CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Headlamp Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 5667 Page 132 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness. Page 313 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 1504 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 1850 Page 2567 Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Procedure After Replacing ECM INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Procedure After Replacing ECM When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. 2. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. 4. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning. VIN Registration INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Page 2742 - Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. - Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. 4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts. - Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts "a" to "b" in illustration and in two steps. 5. Install fuel hose assembly. Follow precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring. - Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent O-ring from being damaged. - Tighten bolts evenly in several steps. - Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts. 6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections using the following steps. 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. WARNING: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot. NOTE: Page 63 Page 1003 Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. Page 776 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Power Window Switch Rear Door Switch REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation - Rear Door Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear power window switch assembly from the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear power window switch (2) from the power window switch finisher (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Power Drop Glass Switch REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation - Power Drop Glass Switch REMOVAL 1. Release the pawls and remove the overhead console switch panel (1) from the overhead console (2). 2. Disconnect the power drop glass switch (3). 3. Remove the power drop glass switch (3) from the overhead console switch panel (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool. CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 282 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 2299 Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit Page 3252 - Arrow Indicates Front 9. Tighten bolt (1), (2) and (3) temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 to 2 to 3). Then tighten other bolts. - Arrow Indicates Front 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A). 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips - Arrow Indicates Terminal clip ABLS/ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Page 413 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair SONAR SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear sonar sensor (1) from the rear bumper (2). 2. Disconnect the rear sonar sensor connector. 3. Remove the rear sonar sensor housing from the rear bumper (2). INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Page 1800 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 134 Concept of auto active test - IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. - The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 5495 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Page 2311 f. Reception item of "M&A;": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means M&A; cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between M&A; and TCM (line 2-f in the figure below). g. Reception item of "ADP": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ADP cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ADP and TCM (line 2-g in the figure below). h. Reception item of "ABS": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between ABS and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. Page 4840 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor (1) is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser (front grille removed for clarity). 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1563 Coolant: Testing and Inspection ENGINE COOLANT Inspection LEVEL CHECK Check if the engine coolant reservoir tank level is within MIN to MAX level when engine is cool. - Adjust engine coolant level as necessary. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS WARNING: Never remove the radiator or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator or reservoir. - To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system at the reservoir filler neck using suitable tool and Tool. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. NOTE: In case that engine coolant decreases, replenish cooling system with engine coolant. If any concerns are found, repair or replace damaged parts. CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP Check reservoir cap relief pressure using suitable tool and Tool. Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced. - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove the left and right side bolts. 2. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel. 3. Disconnect the air bag harness and horn connectors, then remove the driver air bag module. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). - Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 5171 - Remove the reinforcement from end cap. 3. Release the clips and remove the step pad from the running board. 4. Remove the nuts and bolts and remove the running board brackets. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2988 CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Page 2266 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram - CAN SYSTEM CAN System - Part 1 Page 1424 Page 1785 Page 271 Page 5108 Speaker: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation Front Tweeter FRONT TWEETER Removal and Installation FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove the front tweeter (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Center Speaker CENTER SPEAKER Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Use a suitable tool to prevent damage to the center speaker grille and the instrument panel. 1. Using a suitable tool, remove the center speaker grille finisher (1). 2. Disconnect the center speaker connector (A). 3. Remove the center speaker screws (B). 4. Remove the center speaker (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Woofer Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications MAIN BEARING Undersize Main Bearing Oil Clearance Page 1721 Page 1755 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Locations Oil Pressure Gauge: Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 6170 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. Page 1509 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation AIR CLEANER FILTER Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) REMOVAL NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. - Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: Maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 181 Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 6201 Windshield: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Inside Mirror. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. - Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. - If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When the windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Page 1949 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 185 Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 2174 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3115 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2478 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1889 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 5949 3. Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp centers as shown. - When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp. Page 3055 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 5792 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 2216 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4738 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair COMPRESSOR Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch Magnet Clutch Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair . 2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown. Tool number : J-44614 3. Remove the clutch disc. 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. 5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small Page 2281 Information Bus: Application and ID CAN System Specification Chart CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CAN System Specification Chart Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet. NOTE: Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for how to use CAN system specification chart. VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION NOTE: Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Locations Page 1760 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 3113 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 5690 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 3954 Battery: Testing and Inspection BATTERY Work Flow TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WITH BATTERY SERVICE CENTER For battery testing, use Battery Service Center (J-48087). For details and operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin and/or Battery Service Center User Guide. Page 3018 Adjustments Shifter A/T: Adjustments SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Adjustment of A/T Position 1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in "P" position. 3. After pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N.m (1kg-m, 2.2 lb-ft), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut : 14.5 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) Page 844 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 1729 Page 397 Page 3075 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Page 5779 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Specifications Timing Chain: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Locations Page 2811 - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 4487 Page 5109 WOOFER Removal and Installation SUBWOOFER Removal 1. Remove the front seat LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer connector (B). Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front 3. Remove the subwoofer bolts (A). 4. Remove the subwoofer (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Door Speaker FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and remove the front door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door Speaker REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation REAR DOOR SPEAKER Page 3178 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description Page 949 Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Page 1809 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 2887 Page 1155 Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery TOW TRUCK TOWING Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. Page 2068 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 2801 Page 843 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 3949 JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps, standard for North American produced batteries IMPORTANT: ^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries. ^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes. ^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available). ^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the Original Equipment battery. ^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data package. (1) (1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III: ^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned on. ^ Click on the ASIST icon. ^ Click on INFO. Tool Box. ^ Select Midtronics GR-8. ^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays. ^ Click on Change MUP File. ^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW. ^ Select 192-725C and click OK. ^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen. If the applicable vehicle still is not listed: 1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for descriptions of each battery. 2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more information. Determine the Battery Type Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Brake Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 1320 Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Removal And Installation OIL COOLER Removal and Installation WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil and engine coolant are hot. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Disconnect water hoses, pinching hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling. CAUTION: Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt. 3. Remove oil filter. Refer to See: Oil Filter/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on the drive belts. 4. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler and O-ring. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: - Confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler or oil pan. - Tighten the connecting bolt after aligning the stopper on the oil pan side with protrusion of the oil cooler. - Remove the valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it. - Install using a new O-ring. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check levels and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to See: Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection and See: Cooling System/Coolant/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil and engine coolant. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level again. Locations Page 5481 19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb). 20. Re-connect the battery cables. 21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details. 22. Re-program the radio presets. 23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for details. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Locations Page 4653 Defroster Nozzle DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR DUCT Removal Locations Shift Indicator: Locations METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location Page 363 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always follow the tightening sequence shown. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "[=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag). Page 3804 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to piston boots. Cover the piston ends with piston boots, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boots securely into the grooves on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boots. 3. Apply clean brake fluid to pistons, then install pistons into cylinder body and insert piston boot side lip into groove of pistons as shown. CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall. 4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 5. Install new sliding pins, bushing and sliding pin boots to torque member. 6. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 5284 8. Remove the door lock knob. 9. Remove the rear door tweeter speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR - KING CAB Removal 1. Remove the upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System. 2. Release the clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove the armrest. 4. Remove the screws behind armrest. 5. Release the clips and remove rear door finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 226 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Ignition System Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2 Page 1454 EM-6 Transfer Case TX15B Service and Repair Trim Panel: Service and Repair BODY SIDE TRIM Removal and Installation KING CAB CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. - When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar finisher. CREW CAB CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. - When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar finisher. A/T Shift Lock System Service and Repair Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair RUNNING BOARDS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts and remove the running board from running board brackets. 2. Remove the screw and remove the end cap. Page 239 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 1724 Page 1347 c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side. d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12 2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper). 3. Install the oil pan (lower). a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section. CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. Component Description Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Component Description FUEL INJECTOR Component Description The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. Page 2291 Driver Seat Control Unit BCM NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG". Front Air Control Page 2427 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Page 1465 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side. Page 6199 condition. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches) ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons. ^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it. Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front FRONT DISC BRAKE BRAKE PAD : Inspection PAD WEAR Check pad thickness from the inspection holes on cylinder body. Check using a scale if necessary. Removal and Replacement Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Exploded View BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER Exploded View With ABS With ABLS/VDC/TCS Page 672 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 3034 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 3272 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD) CARRIER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain the differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable (A) and brake tube (B) from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the carrier cover bolts and separate the carrier cover from the gear carrier using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface. - Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 2. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 3. Connect the parking brake cable and brake tube to the carrier cover. 4. Fill the rear final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Page 5759 Speedometer Module: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : Component Description Page 704 Knock Sensor: Locations Page 988 engine removal or repair. - The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. - Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. 2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. 3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the cooling system. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695) 5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to See: . Cooling system capacity (with reservoir) : Refer to See: . 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Page 2173 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Electrical Units Location Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Classification: BR10-005 Reference: NTB10-081 Date: June 25, 2010 2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body or brake pads, ACTION: Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service. NOTE: The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed brake pad removal procedures. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially drain the brake fluid. ^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual. 2. Remove the front wheels. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal. Page 4273 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3 Locations Page 5703 Page 4367 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 3321 8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 13. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Mechanical Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications Oil Pump SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Regulator Valve SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE Page 3482 Switch: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. - Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front 6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. - For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 7. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 2088 Transfer Case TX15B Page 3146 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 56 - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. - Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. - Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 2795 Page 1917 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Locations Page 5599 Page 4342 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transmission assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly 2. Before removing the drive plate, put a match mark (A) on the crankshaft and drive plate for alignment during installation. 3. Lock the drive plate using Tool (A). Tool number : - (J-47245) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting tool. - Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate. NOTE: Remove the bolts diagonally. 4. Remove the drive plate. CAUTION: Never place drive plate with signal plate facing down. - When handling the signal plate, take care not to damage or scratch it. - Handle the signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becoming magnetized. 5. Remove the engine rear plate. Page 4407 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 3097 Page 5758 Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : System Description The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 3050 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 5775 Page 5035 Page 1289 Drive Belt: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown. Tool number : - (J-46535) CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys. - Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. Page 5660 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Low-Pressure Flexible Hose Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible Hose LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation . 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Description and Operation Driver Air Bag Module SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM Driver Air Bag Module The driver air bag module is dual stage and located in the steering wheel assembly. It operates with the SRS system in a frontal collision exceeding a specified level. Page 2229 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 2441 Page 3026 Page 2313 4. Through the above procedure, the error is detected in the TCM branch line (shaded in the figure below). NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List. 5. Perform the inspection for the detected error circuit. For the inspection procedure, refer to "MALFUNCTION AREA CHART". Page 5583 Automatic Air Conditioner Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Component Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 2249 Page 2208 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 256 Page 4269 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2351 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of front air control. 2. Check the resistance between the front air control harness connector terminals. Models with auto A/C - Models with 3 control dial system - Models with 2 control dial system Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the front air control branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the front air control. Refer to the following. Models with automatic air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Automatic Air Conditioner/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Controller/Diagnosis Procedure - Models with manual air conditioner - type 1: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Manual A/C (Type 1 - Two Control Dial System)/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Controller/Diagnosis Procedure - Models with manual air conditioner - type 2: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Manual A/C (Type 2 - Three Control Dial System)/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Controller/Diagnosis Procedure Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the front air control. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module HVAC/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the front air control branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. STRG Branch Line Circuit STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor. 2. Check the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals. System Diagram Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram Page 5793 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Locations Page 4381 Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) Exploded View Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Exploded View Locations Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations Page 3664 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Locations Page 135 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R) APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. DATA MONITOR Page 1433 b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) point outside. If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley. a. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using a hammer handle to secure the crankshaft. b. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using tool. - Remove the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool. Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in). 6. Remove the front cover. a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Page 2156 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 4271 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Wiring Diagram IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1 Page 2425 Page 2853 Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Electrical Units Location Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 5166 NOTE: See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover: CAUTION: ^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover. Page 2517 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 4174 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out from square hole (A). NOTE: Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) requires riveted finisher removal from bed prior to socket removal. 3. Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing. Page 926 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range (between three line notches). NOTE: Check the drive belt auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold. - The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the drive belt auto tensioner. 3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to See: Service and Repair. DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto tensioner. Page 3682 Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 2871 Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Locations Page 2642 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (RH). 3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 3937 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3405 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Propeller Shaft 2S1410 PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Brake Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 4494 Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 636 Page 4116 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2 Page 5621 Page 4123 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System System Diagram SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Diagram System Description SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System Description. Page 577 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Component. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. System Diagram Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram Page 2035 - No. 3 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front - A: RH - B: LH - C: Exhaust - D: Intake - E: No. 2 cylinder - F: No. 4 cylinder Page 1458 EM-11 Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Locations Page 1199 Standard : 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in) Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (camshaft journal diameter) Standard : 0.030 - 0.071 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) - If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly. Camshaft End Play - Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) - If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again. - If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head. - Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value. - Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard : 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008-1.2027 in) - Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal Standard : 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953-1.1963 in) - If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head. Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Page 1668 ^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are located (see Figure 1 and 2 above). > The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield. > If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply. 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for example). Page 217 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Service and Repair Idler Pulley: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3058 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Stabilizer Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Classification: FA10-003A Reference: NTB10-072A Date: October 6, 2010 FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN 6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct 23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All IF YOU CONFIRM A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following actions: ^ turning the steering wheel left or right ^ driving over speed bumps ^ driving on rough roads ^ accelerating or decelerating AND The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing. ACTIONS Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and installation instructions. Page 3622 Switch: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. - Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front 6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. - For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 7. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 6165 Arrow Indicates Vehicle Front 4. Connect the rear window defogger. 5. Lower the window and install the rear window glass bolts. Rear window glass bolts : 6.0 N.m (0.61 Kg-m, 53 in-lb) 6. Install the sealing screen. 7. Install the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following operations are performed the limit switch must be reset. Motor operation when not installed in the vehicle. - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. Page 4238 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Reference Value IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Reference Value VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Page 3349 CAUTION: If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated by the * marks) of the drive shaft and joint sub-assembly, the boot may come off. Remove all grease from the drive shaft surfaces. 7. Check that the boot installation length "L" is the specified length. Insert a suitable tool into the large end of the boot, as shown. Bleed the air from the boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length "L" : 168.4 mm (6.63 in) CAUTION: The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified length. - Do not contact inside surface of boot with the tip of the suitable tool. 8. Secure large and small ends of the boot using new boot bands using tool as shown. Tool number : KV40107300 ( - ) NOTE: Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly. - Secure boot band so that dimension "M" meets specification as shown. Dimension "M" : 1.0 - 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in) 9. After installing the housing to the shaft, rotate the boot to check that it is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned correctly, remove the old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure the boot with new boot bands. Page 4167 Page 4229 - Erase DTC. - Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time. NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. - Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10 10. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO TO 6 OK - Inspection End. IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Fail Safe Page 1531 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Page 2423 Locations Page 327 ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 3535 Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Do not damage front case. INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front oil seal until it is flush with the end face of the front case using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( - ) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. - Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. 2. Align the matching mark of the front drive shaft with the matching mark of the companion flange, then install the companion flange. 3. Install the new self-lock nut and tighten to the specified torque using Tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly . Tool number : KV40104000 ( - ) Page 5623 Physical Values BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Physical Values Page 1911 Page 5347 2. Remove control device. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Shifter A/T/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 3. Remove lower instrument panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Remove center console lower cover RH/LH. 5. Remove front center console screws. 6. Move front seats (including seat back) to forward most position, then remove rear center console screws. 7. Lift rear of center console upward then rearward to disengage heat duct. 8. Remove center console through rear door opening. CAUTION: When removing, two workers are required (one for each front and rear of center console). Cover seating and interior surfaces with a shop cloth to prevent damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 4050 Page 642 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6231 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP Washer Motor REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove washer fluid reservoir. Refer to See: Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service and Repair. 2. Remove washer motor (1) in the direction of the arrow as shown, from washer fluid reservoir (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3118 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 1428 Crankshaft Pulley Timing Cover Install the bolts in the numerical order shown. Page 6038 Page 4278 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals received via CAN communication. CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed. Page 6189 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 2021 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Page 285 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 2736 4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E2, F32 - IPDM E/R connector E119 - 15A fuse - Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse - Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42, 44, 63. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Injector/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 7. NG - Replace malfunctioning fuel injector. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/How To Check Terminal and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. - INSPECTION END Automatic Air Conditioner Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Component Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Procedures Brake Pad: Procedures REAR DISC BRAKE Brake Burnishing Procedure Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and pads according to following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate easily until pad and disc rotor are securely seated. - Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely seated. Page 1021 2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Rear Final Drive M226 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it. 2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Page 4943 3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. 4. Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector. Installation - Bucket Seat CAUTION: Passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. On passenger seat during installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they were originally in. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. Remove center front seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation . 2. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt. 3. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt buckle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2477 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 4684 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 2560 Page 1772 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2331 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 8) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 8) Rear Window Defogger System Page 126 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System System Diagram POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Description OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. - IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication. Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active. - CAN transmission is stopped. SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION - IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication. - Front wiper fail-safe operation - Outputting signals to actuators - Switches or relays operating - Auto active test is starting - Emergency OFF - Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication. - IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled. WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start. - Ignition switch ON - An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication. Page 5517 4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate. 5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows: CAUTION: Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the plastic panel. a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic insert. b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as shown in Figure 4. c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the tube. NOTE: If the insert is difficult to remove: Page 2842 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 884 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 5704 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 3653 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Locations Odometer: Locations METER SYSTEM ODO/TRIP METER : Component Parts Location Page 5781 Page 5566 Warning Chime - Part 2 Page 171 Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Oil pan (upper) Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan (lower) Locations Page 2415 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Page 4237 Page 2108 ABLS/ABS Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow OVERALL SEQUENCE DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data. VDC/TCS/ABS Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 1922 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Page 1562 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Type Type .................................................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent. 50% Antifreeze/Coolant 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water. Page 3504 Page 4562 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 2127 Page 2121 Relay Control System Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System System Diagram RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description Page 5612 Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - GO TO 3 3.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect BCM and key switch connectors. 2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 and key switch harness connector M80. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground. Page 2959 Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly Brake Pedal Assy: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010 Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56, and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket. CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 4756 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL Increases or decreases the set temperature. - When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. - When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. - REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor position. Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position, and turns A/C compressor ON. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED) When switch is ON, rear window and door mirrors are defogged. BLOWER CONTROL DIAL/OFF SWITCH - The blower speed is manually controlled with this dial. - The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot position. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.) MODE CONTROL DIAL Controls the air discharge outlets. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL Page 695 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 2189 Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Ball Joint Page 2953 REPAIR FLOW CHART With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 264 Page 2335 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 12) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 12) Page 4033 Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX Propeller Shaft 2F1310 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Propeller Shaft 2F1310 PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool Page 3827 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a suitable tool. Refer to See: Diagrams. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 216 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 2188 Page 3537 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Oil Seal REAR OIL SEAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the transfer fluid. Refer to See: Fluid - Transfer Case/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410. 3. Remove the dust cover from the rear case. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. 4. Remove the rear oil seal from the rear case using Tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) INSTALLATION 1. Install the new rear oil seal until it is flush with the end face of the rear case using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( - ) CAUTION: Page 4283 - Erase DTC. - Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time. NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. - Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10 10. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO TO 6 OK - Inspection End. IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Fail Safe Service and Repair Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly to replace the seat cushion. Service and Repair Fluid Pump: Service and Repair REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Oil Pump COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover. 2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. 3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing. Page 1392 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Description The engine oil pressure gauge indicates whether the engine oil pressure is low or normal. The oil pressure gauge is controlled by the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via BCM with the CAN communication line. The oil pressure gauge displays a low or normal indication according to the oil pressure switch signal received via CAN communication. Page 674 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Locations Information Bus: Locations CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 3388 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification. 2. If the runout exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180° and 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft. 3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification. 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle. Propeller Shaft 3S1410 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT On-Vehicle Service PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION NOTE: If vibration is present at high speed, check propeller shaft runout first, then check mounting between propeller shaft and companion flange. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 3S1410/General Specification. 2. If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° and reconnect propeller shaft. 3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly. 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle. INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Page 5580 Page 2798 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Service and Repair Dome Lamp Switch: Service and Repair ILLUMINATION Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal The illumination control switch (1) is replaced as a part of the combination meter assembly. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE B (if equipped) Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens (1). 3. Remove personal lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the connector, then remove personal lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Page 5584 Page 5349 Disassembly And Assembly CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Page 839 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 2153 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 921 Page 4268 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 3800 pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 4. Remove union bolt, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. NOTE: Discard the copper washers, do not reuse. 5. Remove torque member bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Do not drop brake pad. 6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly as shown if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel hub assembly as shown, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in place. CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. 2. Install brake caliper assembly, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Page 5241 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Page 5717 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Service and Repair Carpet: Service and Repair FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the rear seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the lower seat belt anchors. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System. 4. Remove the lower body side trim. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the center console, if equipped. Refer to See: Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 6. Remove the floor mat hooks from front carpet. 7. Remove the carpet. INSTALLATION Locations Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Rear Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4337 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 2061 Page 2134 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Classification: HA10-006 Reference: NTB10-043 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating normally: ^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation instructions. Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer control device. 4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 2. Install the transfer control device. a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a mark on the control shift rod. Page 3801 CAUTION: Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and caliper assembly, bolts, and washer. 3. Install brake hose to brake caliper assembly using new copper washers. Align the brake hose to the projection as shown and tighten union bolts to the specified torque. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 5. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install front wheel and tires. Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly Automatic Air Conditioner Blower Motor: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM System Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Blower speed control system components are: Front air control - Variable blower control - Front blower motor relay - Front blower motor - In-vehicle sensor - Ambient sensor - Optical sensor - Intake sensor System Operation Automatic Mode In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control and variable blower control based on input from the in-vehicle sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor, and potentio temperature control (PTC). When the air flow is increased, the blower motor speed is adjusted gradually to prevent a sudden increase in air flow. In addition to manual air flow control and the usual automatic air flow control, starting air flow control, low water temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting control are available. Starting Blower Speed Control Start up from cold soak condition (Automatic mode). In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 50°C (122°F), the blower will not operate at blower speed 1 for a short period of time (up to 210 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the ambient and engine coolant temperatures. In the most extreme case (very low ambient temperature) the blower starting delay will be 210 seconds as described above. After the coolant temperature reaches 50°C (122°F), or the 210 seconds has elapsed, the blower speed will increase to the objective blower speed. Start up from usual operating or hot soak condition (Automatic mode). The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO switch is pushed. The blower speed will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective blower speed). Blower Speed Compensation - Sunload When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low speed. The speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of low or no sunload, the blower operates at low speed. During high sunload conditions, the front air control causes the blower speed to increase. Page 4918 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SRS Air Bag System Front Side Air Bag SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM Front Side Air Bag Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Side Curtain Air Bag SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM Side Curtain Air Bag Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining. Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Page 6004 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Front Brake Pad: Specifications Front Brake Pad Brake Model : AD41VA Standard thickness (new)..................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Repair limit thickness..................................... ............................................................................................................................................. 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Page 2296 NOTE: For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III is not available.) - Refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis for the details. Condition Of Error Detection TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Condition of Error Detection "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both) - CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses) - Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line WHEN "U1000" OR "U1001" IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IS NORMAL Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may be detected.) - Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease. - Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication). - Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication, malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication). - Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally. NOTE: CAN communication system is normal if "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of CONSULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each unit. Self-Diagnosis TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Self-Diagnosis Page 4284 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION - IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. - IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. - If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times. NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays "Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. Page 4289 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R) APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. DATA MONITOR Page 1895 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 219 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4136 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Reference Value IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Reference Value VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Page 1253 Piston: Service and Repair HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING How to Select Piston and Bearing DESCRIPTION *For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. - For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table. - For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure. HOW TO SELECT PISTON Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block, and select the piston of the same grade. When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure cylinder block bore diameter. 2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the "Cylinder bore diameter" of the piston selection table. Page 2529 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Locations Page 1719 Page 1450 EM-2 Page 2662 Page 1885 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Page 4026 Fuse: Locations Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Page 3101 Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 3690 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. If equipped, remove the front center seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 4. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 1204 - D: Intake side - Arrow Indicates Front a. Tighten the RH (A) and LH (B) front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown to the specified torque. Front cover bolts : 11.0 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) 5. Install the camshaft sprockets using the following procedure: A: LH bank shown a. Install the camshaft sprockets aligning them with the matching marks painted on the timing chain (B) and the camshaft sprockets (C) before removal. Align the camshaft sprocket key groove with the dowel pin on the camshaft front edge at the same time. Then temporarily tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. - Install the intake (VTC) (A) and exhaust (B) side camshaft sprockets by selectively using the groove of the dowel pin according to the bank for the exhaust (B) side camshaft sprockets. (Common part used for both exhaust banks.) NOTE: Use the groove marked "R" for RH bank and "L" for LH bank. b. Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts. c. Check again that the timing alignment mark on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Page 648 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Page 221 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2116 Page 5027 DVD Player: Locations Premium Without Navigation DVD PLAYER Component Parts Location Page 2119 Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair PARKING BRAKE SHOE Removal and Installation COMPONENTS REMOVAL WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position. 1. Remove the rear disc rotor. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Disconnect the rear cable from the toggle lever, if necessary. Remove pin retainer and withdraw cable end from toggle lever. 5. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lining Thickness Inspection Check thickness of lining. Engine Compartment Page 273 System Diagram Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 4128 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION - IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. - IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. - If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times. NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays "Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 4474 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT Inspection - Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the following exists: - Ball joint stud is worn. - Ball joint is hard to swing. - Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. Swinging Force NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. 1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool. Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown. - Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown. 2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification. Turning Force NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Page 3352 Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Commercial Service Tools PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 5342 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5456 10. Remove the outboard J-Clip. WARNING: Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. 11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly. Automatic Air Conditioner Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Component Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 2554 Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminal And Reference Value ECM ECM Terminal and Reference Value PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Arm Rest: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Classification: BT08-037 Reference: NTB09-005 Date: January 15, 2009 FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front driver seat armrest is loose. ACTION Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position. b. Fully recline the driver seatback. Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair HEADLINING Removal and Installation Crew Cab Page 5794 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. ABLS/ABS Page 1283 Page 2945 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 4793 Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 4754 Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cowl top seal. Release the plastics clips on the cowl top seal which go through the cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension. 3. Remove the cowl top covers LH and RH. Release the plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge. - Disconnect the washer tubes from washer nozzles. 4. Remove the cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect the wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH. - Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of the wiper motor and connecting rod assembly. 5. Remove the wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect the windshield washer tube. Refer to See: Diagrams/Mechanical Diagrams/Windshield Washer Hose. 7. Remove the A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Low-Pressure Pipe. 8. Remove the drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove the cowl top extension. INSTALLATION Page 3823 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Inspection After Installation BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE Inspection After Installation CAUTION: Brake tubes and hoses are important safety parts. Always disassemble the parts and retighten their fittings, if a brake fluid leak is detected. Replace applicable part with a new one, if a damaged part is detected. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any parts as necessary. Refer to See: Diagrams. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg-f, 177 lb-f) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check each part for fluid leaks. Locations Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Service and Repair Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the sonar control unit. Sonar control unit (king cab) (1) - Sonar control unit (crew cab) (2) 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the two bolts and remove the sonar control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (LH). 5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 2290 TCM NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG". Differential Lock Control Unit NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG". Exploded View Water Pump: Service and Repair Exploded View WATER PUMP Exploded View Page 5507 A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown. B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube. C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert. D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the rubber o-ring. E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5. F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant. 6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer. ^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube. 7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies. ^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base. 8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks. Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Power Window Main Switch Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Main Switch POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the power window main switch assembly from the front door finisher LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws from the power window main switch (1) using suitable tool (A). Then release the power window main switch (1) from the finisher (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4486 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Page 2369 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 1979 Page 5253 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 2-1/8 U.S. qts (2.0 L) Electrical Units Location Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 2307 CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET NOTE: Be sure to use the diagnosis sheet for the correct CAN system type. Print Diagnosis Sheet Print the diagnosis sheet for the applicable CAN system type. Check Collected Data Make sure that all ECUs are received, referring to "ECU list". For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List. Page 1938 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 3536 CAUTION: Do not reuse self-lock nut. 4. Install the front propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2F1310. 5. Refill the transfer with fluid and check for fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid Transfer Case/Service and Repair. Page 2322 Information Needed For Trouble Diagnosis DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis CAN communication system performs trouble diagnosis with the following tools. Locations Shift Indicator: Locations METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location Page 398 Control Module: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) - After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 2123 Page 5568 Warning Chime - Part 4 Page 1234 Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals) Page 3091 Page 129 - Erase DTC. - Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time. NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. - Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10 10. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO TO 6 OK - Inspection End. IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Fail Safe Page 2236 Page 698 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 507 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 964 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible Hose HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to See: Filters/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation . 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Locations Page 3341 8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring retainer to remove it. CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press. 10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press. Tool number : ST30031000 ( - ) CAUTION: Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft. - Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 12. Remove the wheel bearing cage. NOTE: If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the seal plate and ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the seal plate and ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Sensor Rotor. The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Sensor Rotor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Axle Shaft Clean and remove all nicks and burrs. - Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary. - Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary. - Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary. Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum) : 39.726 mm (1.5640 in) Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Bearing Cage Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Housing Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Sensor Rotor. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. 2. Install the seal plate. Page 1693 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 554 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (LH). 5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 3151 Disclaimer Relay Control System Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System System Diagram RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description Page 4236 Monitor item ACTIVE TEST Test item Page 5280 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 2157 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 4368 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 4655 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts. 6. Remove the center ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5610 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector and seat belt buckle switch LH connector. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 (B) terminal 27 and seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 (A) terminal 1. 27 - 1 : Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 (B) terminal 27 and ground. 27 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 2 and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should exist. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair harness or connector. Component Inspection SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Inspection 1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH Page 1829 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 3498 b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not match. c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly. 3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 2240 Page 6067 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3159 NOTE: The A/T fluid level will be significantly affected by the A/T fluid temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the A/T fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-III. a. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-III. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1". 6. Re-check the A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown. The HOT range is between 50° - 80° C (122° - 176° F). CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth. - To check the A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown. 7. Check the A/T fluid condition. If the A/T fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may be an internal problem with the transmission. Refer to See: Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning. Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission. - If the A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission. 8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe. 9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. Exploded View Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER FILTER Exploded View Page 5744 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Description The engine oil pressure gauge indicates whether the engine oil pressure is low or normal. The oil pressure gauge is controlled by the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via BCM with the CAN communication line. The oil pressure gauge displays a low or normal indication according to the oil pressure switch signal received via CAN communication. Page 5574 Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Page 1194 Camshaft: Service and Repair Removal And Installation CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation NOTE: Do not remove the engine assembly to perform this procedure. REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) point outside. - If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 3. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. Page 172 Page 4014 Power Socket - Part 3 A/F Sensor 1 Heater Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A/F Sensor 1 Heater Page 5605 Perform inspection of the seat belt buckle switch circuit. Refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Seat Belt Buckle Switch Signal Circuit/Diagnosis Procedure. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH UNIT Perform a unit inspection for the seat belt buckle switch. Refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Seat Belt Buckle Switch Signal Circuit/Component Inspection. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. NO - Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH. The Key Warning Does Not Sound THE KEY WARNING DOES NOT SOUND Description Key warning does not sound even though key is in ignition and front door LH is opened. THE KEY WARNING DOES NOT SOUND Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. Does warning chime sound? YES - GO TO 2 NO - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform inspection of the key switch circuit. Refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Key Switch Signal Circuit/Diagnosis Procedure. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK KEY SWITCH Perform a unit inspection for the key switch. Refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Key Switch Signal Circuit/Component Inspection. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. NO - Replace the key switch (column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift). Page 4065 Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 3059 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1849 Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Marker Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 5282 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove the screw. 4. Remove the pull handle escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screw behind armrest. 6. Remove the window crank handle, using a suitable tool (if equipped). 7. Remove the memory seat switch (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector. 8. Remove the step lamp. Page 4320 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 2298 Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit NOTE: When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit. - When data link connector branch line is open, "ECU list" displayed on the CONSULT-III "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" may be the same as when the CAN communication line has short-circuit. However, symptoms differ depending on the case. See below chart for the differences. Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit Page 3654 - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Automatic Air Conditioner Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Component Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 5838 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. A/T Shift Lock System Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Classification: EM09-001A Reference: NTB09-040A Date: May 14, 2010 NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. SERVICE INFORMATION In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color. NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC. ^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. ^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5 years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills. Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct www.NissanChemicals.com. ^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted: P/N 999MP - LP25500P > The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water. > Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC. Page 3342 3. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 4. Install a new axle oil seal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 5. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 in) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 in) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 in). - Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and seat. CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct direction. 6. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lb) until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point. 7. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers. 8. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 9. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 10. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 11. Install the rear brake rotor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 12. Install the rear ABS sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors. Page 1341 Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown. Page 5537 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 10. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace stop lamp switch. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. INSPECTION END ABLS/ABS Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Marker Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 5047 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 1786 Premium Without Navigation DVD Player: Description and Operation Premium Without Navigation System Diagram DVD PLAYER System Diagram System Description DVD PLAYER System Description The DVD entertainment system consists of the following components Audio unit - DVD player - Video monitor - AV switch - Steering wheel audio control switches - Rear audio remote control unit - Audio amp. - Front tweeters - Front door speakers - Center speaker - Rear door tweeters (crew cab) - Rear door speakers - Subwoofer When the DVD entertainment system is on, video signals are sent from the DVD player to the video monitor. Audio signals are sent to the Audio unit. Audio signals can be directed through the wireless infrared headphones or through the audio amp. to the vehicle speakers. Refer to complete DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Component Description DVD PLAYER Component Description Page 3684 REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 3292 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Types Front(4WD) ............................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 or API GL-5 Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... API GL-5 Synthetic Gear Oil or equivalent Recommended Viscosity Front .................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 80W-90 Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................... 75W-140 Page 1008 Disclaimer Page 2656 Assembly. c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using power tool. e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (RH). INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) - If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. - Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - Arrow indicates Front - Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and apply antiseize lubricant. Page 804 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 120 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4 Page 3513 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Replacement TRANSFER FLUID Replacement CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: Maintenance. DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and gasket and drain the fluid. 3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket. 2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance. CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes.) 3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 2235 Page 1564 NOTE: Apply engine coolant to the cap seal. - Replace the reservoir cap if there is any damage in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the limit. CHECKING RADIATOR CAP Inspect the radiator cap. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. - Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. - Pull negative-pressure valve to open it and make sure that it closes completely when released. - Make sure that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator cap negative-pressure valve. - Make sure that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing conditions of negative-pressure valve. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 653 Page 194 Attachment General Procedure Page 2649 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 3868 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection BRAKE BOOSTER Inspection OPERATION With engine stopped, change vacuum to atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when vacuum pressure reaches the standard, make sure that clearance between brake pedal and floor panel decreases. AIR TIGHT - Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster. Depress brake pedal normally to change vacuum to atmospheric pressure. Make sure that distance at intervals of 5 seconds between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases. - Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Locations Page 5544 Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 7. 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Page 2530 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2836 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 552 Page 4168 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram Power Socket - Part 1 A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Classification: HA10-004 Reference: NTB10-044 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally: ^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions. Page 3284 Switch: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. - Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front 6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. - For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 7. Remove adjuster lock plates. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 268 Transfer Case TX15B Page 225 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 2161 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Electrical Units Location Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 318 Page 2120 Page 1739 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. A/T Shift Lock System Page 1075 Fuse: Locations Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Locations Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 1894 Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3582 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Power Window Main Switch Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Main Switch POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the power window main switch assembly from the front door finisher LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws from the power window main switch (1) using suitable tool (A). Then release the power window main switch (1) from the finisher (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3916 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Page 6043 Page 1836 Page 3085 ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 1375 OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 2740 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 4. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (RH bank and LH bank). CAUTION: While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining. - Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose. 6. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly. 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube. a. Spread open to remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out. CAUTION: Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube. - Do not damage injector nozzles during removal. - Do not bump or drop fuel injectors. - Do not disassemble fuel injectors. 8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube. INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube. Page 2352 Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the steering angle sensor branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/VDC/TCS/ABS. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the steering angle sensor branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. 4WD Branch Line Circuit 4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of transfer control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the transfer control unit harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the transfer control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the transfer control unit. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1801. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the transfer control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. ABS Branch Line Circuit ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. Page 4133 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R) APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. DATA MONITOR Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Page 2442 Page 3077 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 1709 Page 1200 2. Install the camshaft sprocket to the camshaft. 3. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout. Runout : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) - If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any wear or cracks. - If any damage is found, replace the valve lifter. - Select the thickness of the head so that the valve clearance is within the standard when replacing. Refer to . Valve Lifter Clearance Valve Lifter Diameter Measure the diameter of the valve lifter. Standard : 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 in) Valve Lifter Hole Diameter Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool. Page 5547 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again. Page 827 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Locations Page 5099 Remote Control Module: Locations Hands-Free Phone System Page 4827 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. ABLS/ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Page 950 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 6177 - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the glass in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Page 2158 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 3652 - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. - Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. - Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 3902 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Page 5133 Page 3022 Service and Repair Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the sonar control unit. Sonar control unit (king cab) (1) - Sonar control unit (crew cab) (2) 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the two bolts and remove the sonar control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2436 Page 2325 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 2) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 2) Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 2394 Page 700 Page 2612 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 2509 Page 1712 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Page 1385 3. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. - Insert until the paint mark for engagement identification (white) goes completely inside quick connector so that you cannot see it from the straight side of the connected part. Use a mirror to check this where it is not possible to view directly from the straight side, such as quick connector on vehicle side. - Insert fuel tube into quick connector until top spool is completely inside quick connector, and 2nd level spool exposes right below quick connector on engine side. CAUTION: Hold "A" position in illustration when inserting fuel tube into quick connector. Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to O-ring inside quick connector. - Insert until you hear a "click" sound and actually feel the engagement. - To avoid mis-identification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step. 4. Pull quick connector by hand holding "A" position. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube. NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb). 5. Install the quick connector cap on the quick connector joint (on engine side only). 6. Install the fuel hose and tube to hose clamps. 7. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps. - Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. - Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at the connections. - Perform procedures for "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" after finishing repairs. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. - If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for "Idle Air Volume Learning" after finishing repairs. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning. Page 4084 Physical Values IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Physical Values PHYSICAL VALUES Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air borne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep rotor free from brake fluid. - Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut. 3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 4. Remove union bolt, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. NOTE: Discard the copper washers, do not reuse. 5. Remove torque member bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly. CAUTION: Do not drop brake pad. 6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly as shown if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel hub assembly as shown, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to Page 1115 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 119 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3 Page 3008 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Page 4685 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 800 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 4386 - Steering gear - Steering column - Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816 Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Reference: NTB10-030B Date: August 16, 2010 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039 NHTSA# 10V-072 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured out of specification. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this activity. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin. Page 2489 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 208 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Locations Page 4171 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service Precautions POWER SOCKET Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 5957 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2548 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 2629 Page 2471 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Locations Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1467 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary. - Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type. - Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. - Check all fluid levels again. - Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. TIMING CHAIN COVER Page 4950 4. Remove one screw and seat cushion outer finisher. 5. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle. 6. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan to remove buckle assy. from seat. Page 3378 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Propeller Shaft 2S1410 General Specification SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification Propeller Shaft Runout Propeller Shaft Joint Flex Effort Journal Axial Play Snap Ring SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Snap Ring Page 3023 Page 1791 Page 1336 EM-8 Page 3431 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair . 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 2. Install the inside seal. 3. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. FITTING INSPECTION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Locations Page 4205 Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 1866 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 5893 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 4484 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Page 1970 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3510 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent Page 141 Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer control device. 4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 2. Install the transfer control device. a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a mark on the control shift rod. Page 1241 Piston Selection Table NOTE: The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. - The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available). HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 2. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 4. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table" to select. When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inside diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. The following steps are the same as in "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used". Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). - A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - Arrow Indicates Front Page 4750 When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM. BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. Locations Page 2553 Page 5708 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Front Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1978 Knock Sensor: Locations Locations Page 3660 Page 2306 Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet Display the trouble diagnosis result of CAN communication with the on-board diagnosis function on the vehicle monitor, etc. Copy them on the on-board diagnosis copy sheet. NOTE: For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III is not available.) - For the details, refer to See: Diagnosis And Repair Work flow/Data Sheet. Page 1359 c. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown. 2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper). 3. Install the oil pan (lower). a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. b. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown. 4. Install the oil pan drain plug. 5. Install engine assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and Installation. Do not fill the engine oil for at least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and add engine oil if necessary. Refer to See: Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again. Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 1769 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5113 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair - Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab. 2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab. 2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear door tweeter connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 2499 Transfer Case TX15B Locations Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 1565 Coolant: Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. - Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only). CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts. 4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown. 5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for Page 2417 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 984 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Type Type .................................................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent. 50% Antifreeze/Coolant 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water. Page 1245 Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals) Page 4613 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Locations Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 5040 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4568 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 2735 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure FUEL INJECTOR Diagnosis Procedure 1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes GO TO 2. No - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 3. 3. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Page 1877 Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 6099 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 1306 Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 323 Page 2036 - G: No. 6 cylinder - H: No. 8 cylinder - J: No. 1 cylinder - K: No. 3 cylinder - L: No. 5 cylinder - M: No. 7 cylinder 11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance: Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Locations Navigation Module: Locations Page 5658 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Locations Page 5561 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 3751 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to piston boots. Cover the piston ends with piston boots, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boots securely into the grooves on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boots. 3. Apply clean brake fluid to pistons, then install pistons into cylinder body and insert piston boot side lip into groove of pistons as shown. CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall. 4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 5. Install new sliding pins, bushing and sliding pin boots to torque member. 6. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. Page 2246 Page 1753 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 4709 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair BLOWER FAN RESISTOR Removal and Installation Front Blower Motor Resistor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the front blower motor resistor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the front blower motor resistor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1435 13. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove the camshaft sprocket. - A: Camshaft holding location CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft when timing chain is disconnected. 14. Repeat the same procedure to remove the RH timing chain and associated parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. - In the same way as for the LH bank, inspect the timing chain and associated parts on the RH bank. INSTALLATION Exploded View Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Exploded View THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Exploded View Page 4619 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 3249 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Do not damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Do not damage connectors. Installation CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Locations Page 3808 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air into union bolt hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Using a suitable tool, remove piston seal from cylinder body as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder body inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder body for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. ABS Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Page 3333 Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Wheel Bearing SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 4207 Page 5056 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Component Description Premium Without Navigation Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation MICROPHONE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front roof console finisher. Refer to XXXX. 2. Disconnect the Bluetooth microphone connector (A). 3. Detach the Bluetooth microphone (1) from the front roof console finisher and remove the Bluetooth microphone (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Page 4217 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Wiring Diagram IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1 Page 1413 Page 2319 5. Fill out the diagnosis sheet based on information from step 4. a. The ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: Assume that a possible cause is no communication between M&A; and ABS. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS. (Line 5-a in the figure below). b. The tachometer moved normally: Put check marks between ECM and M&A.; The circuit between ECM and M&A; is functioning properly (check marks 5-b in the figure below). Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Leaf Spring Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Application and ID Paint, Striping and Decals: Application and ID BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR Body Exterior Paint Color Page 4808 Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System. Page 1133 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 452 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. Page 3250 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) to control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (PTC) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Page 4622 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 2723 Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Locations Exploded View Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Exploded View FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Exploded View Page 1611 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 5952 Fog/Driving Lamp: Service and Repair Removal And Installation FRONT FOG LAMP Removal and Installation The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. CAUTION: Do not leave fog lamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the fog lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly just before replacement bulb is installed. - Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. Removal 1. Position the fender protector aside. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove nut and pull fog lamp out of front fascia. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6075 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 2324 Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Premium With Navigation/Diagnosis System (Audio Unit)/Audio Unit. Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 1) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 1) Page 4298 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Capacity With filter .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................. 6-7/8 U.S. qts (6.5 L) Without filter ......................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 6-1/2 U.S. qts (6.2 L) Page 1815 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 5576 Page 2541 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Locations Page 5720 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 2234 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (PTC) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Page 3782 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear REAR DISC BRAKE DISC ROTOR : Inspection VISUAL Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace as necessary. RUNOUT 1. Attach disc rotor to wheel hub using wheel nuts (at two or more positions). 2. Inspect runout using dial gauge placed at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside disc edge. Runout limit : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Disc Brake (with it attached to the vehicle) NOTE: Before measuring, make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection. 3. When runout exceeds limit value, displace mounting positions of disc rotor by one hole. And then find a position of the minimum value for runout. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above operation, turn disc rotor using Tool. Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 ( - ) THICKNESS Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace disc rotor if the thickness is under the wear limit. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 1603 NOTE: Lift A/C condenser up and forward to remove from radiator. 9. Remove A/T oil cooler bolts and oil cooler from radiator and position aside. 10. Lift up and remove the radiator. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant and A/T fluid. Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket Page 116 Page 331 Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 Power Window Main Switch Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Main Switch POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the power window main switch assembly from the front door finisher LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws from the power window main switch (1) using suitable tool (A). Then release the power window main switch (1) from the finisher (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5477 7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate. 8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3. Page 4382 Ride Height Page 5092 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair MID Audio AUDIO UNIT Removal and Installation AUDIO UNIT Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect the audio unit connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AV SWITCH Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the AV switch screws. 4. Carefully remove the AV switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1205 6. Install the chain tensioner using the following procedure: NOTE: LH is shown. a. Install the chain tensioner. - Compress the plunger and hold it using a stopper pin when installing. - Loosen the slack guide side timing chain by rotating the camshaft hexagonal part if mounting space is small. Chain tensioner bolts : 6.9 N.m (0.70 kg-m, 61 in-lb) b. Remove the stopper pin and release the plunger, and then apply tension to the timing chain. c. Install the chain tensioner cover onto the front cover. - Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Chain tensioner cover bolts : 9.0 N.m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb) 7. Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to . 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2817 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 5687 Page 5252 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 1353 c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Then install the front cover. d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All except the above e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. 4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: - Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown. D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C) that cannot be seen after attaching the cover. b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. - A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) Service and Repair Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly to replace the seat cushion. Page 5591 Removal and Replacement Glove Compartment: Removal and Replacement Exploded View INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX Exploded View Removal And Installation INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Page 3958 CHARGING THE BATTERY CAUTION: Never "quick charge" a fully discharged battery. - Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. - When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Never turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. - If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55 °C (131 °F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 55 °C (131 °F) . Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced. Special Repair Requirement BATTERY Special Repair Requirement Page 3069 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Page 4135 Page 1267 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine room cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 3399 NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the propeller joint flex effort specification. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification. Propeller Shaft 3S1410 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke. Page 1284 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 3345 3. Remove the stopper ring with suitable tool as shown, and pull the housing off. 4. Remove the snap ring, then remove the ball cage, steel ball, inner race assembly from the drive shaft. 5. Remove the boot from the drive shaft. 6. Remove any old grease on the housing using paper towels. Wheel Side 1. Mount the drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the vise and the drive shaft. 2. Remove the boot bands, then remove the boot from the joint sub-assembly. 3. Screw a suitable drive shaft puller 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into the threaded part of the joint sub-assembly. Pull the joint subassembly off of the drive shaft as shown. NOTE: Align the sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove the joint sub-assembly by pulling directly. CAUTION: If the joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more attempts, replace the drive shaft and joint subassembly as a set. 4. Remove the boot from the drive shaft. 5. Remove the circlip from the drive shaft. 6. While rotating the ball cage, remove any old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper towels. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Drive Shaft Replace the drive shaft if there is any runout, cracking, or other damage. Joint Sub-assembly Locations Page 923 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 5626 Page 1255 Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table. Undersize Bearings Usage Guide When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use undersize (US) bearings. - When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with the bearing installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Bearing undersize table CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft pins). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the main bearing housing grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block to the row in "Main Bearings Selection Table". Page 969 - Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed. - To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 1474 - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. Page 1315 Engine Oil: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL Changing Engine Oil WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. - Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer. CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug : 34.3 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) 7. Refill with new engine oil. Refer to See: Maintenance. Engine oil capacity (Approximate): CAUTION: The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. Page 2336 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 13) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 13) Page 407 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Locations Page 4059 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Exploded View Radiator: Service and Repair Exploded View RADIATOR Exploded View Page 4088 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1994 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2826 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 1830 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 631 Page 4621 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Locations Mechanical Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications Oil Pump SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Regulator Valve SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE Page 1916 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 1233 Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal) Page 1472 c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Then install the front cover. d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All except the above e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. 4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: - Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown. D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C) that cannot be seen after attaching the cover. b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. - A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) Page 3643 Repair Flow Chart Engine Controls - DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM Classification: EC08-013B Reference: NTB08-060B Date: May 20, 2009 2008 - 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0133 / P0153 This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information and Service Procedure have been updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2009 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0133 and/or P0153 (A/F Sensor 1) is stored in the ECM and There are no drivability issues, ACTIONS 1. Refer to Step 2 in the Service Procedure to confirm this bulletin applies to the vehicle you are working on. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table above. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 1285 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 2202 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1269 - No. 3 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front - A: RH - B: LH - C: Exhaust - D: Intake - E: No. 2 cylinder - F: No. 4 cylinder Page 5360 Glove Compartment: Overhaul INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove damper clip (if equipped) from glove box. 2. Remove glove box pins and glove box. 3. Remove glove box striker screws, using power tool and remove glove box striker. 4. Remove fuse block cover. 5. Remove glove box damper screws and remove glove box damper (if equipped). ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Page 1539 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection COMPRESSION PRESSURE Checking Compression Pressure 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-III). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. - If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. - If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. - If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. - If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/CAN Communication. Page 798 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair FRONT GRILLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Release the plastic clips and remove the front grille. 2. Remove the LH and RH front bumper filler panels. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Page 246 Page 5991 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Specifications Piston: Specifications Available Piston Locations Locations Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 3659 System Diagram Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 2160 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 3170 - Apply ATF to oil seal. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) 4. Install oil pump housing in oil pump cover. Tighten oil pump housing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. Page 2972 Control Module: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) - After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 4612 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 2406 Locations Page 3343 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Axle Shaft Removal and Installation DRIVE SHAFT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine under cover using power tool. 3. Remove wheel sensor harness from mount on knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 4. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front . NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Coil Spring And Strut . 6. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. Support lower link with jack. Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 7. Remove cotter pin, then remove drive shaft nut. 8. Remove drive shaft bolts from front final drive. 9. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Page 3082 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1 example): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. With Intelligent Key System Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 539 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 4244 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3840 - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. - Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. - Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement. Page 2167 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Service and Repair Courtesy Lamp: Service and Repair INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Removal and Installation ROOM/MAP LAMP Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console (3). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect connectors (4) and remove the room/map lamp screws (1), then remove room/map lamp (2) from overhead console (3). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), remove room/map lamp lens (1). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tool (A) to protect the housing and lens (1). 3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight downward to remove. Room/map lamp bulb : 12V - 6W VANITY MIRROR LAMP Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Page 4009 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 3892 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Never reuse drained brake fluid. Service and Repair Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY Wiper Motor and Linkage REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Remove wiper frame bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 3. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. Installation CAUTION: Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. - Check the grease condition of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install wiper frame assembly. 4. Install cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 5. Ensure that wiper blades stop within proper clearance. Refer to front wiper arm adjustment See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. Page 1518 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 5969 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 5818 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description Page 3347 4. Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, onto the housing (indicated by * marks), and install it onto shaft. Refer to See: Maintenance . Grease capacity : 130 - 150 g (4.58 - 5.29 oz) 5. Install the stopper ring onto the housing. 6. After installation, pull on the shaft to check engagement between the sliding joint and the stopper ring. 7. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. 8. Check that the boot installation length "L" is the length indicated below. Insert a suitable tool into the large end of the boot, as shown. Bleed air from the boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length "L" : 145 mm (5.71 in) CAUTION: The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified value. - Do not contact inside surface of boot with tip of the suitable tool. 9. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with the new boot bands as shown. NOTE: Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly. 10. After installing the sliding joint housing to the drive shaft, rotate the boot to check that the boot is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned correctly, reposition the boot and secure the boot using a new boot band. Wheel Side 1. Insert the Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly serration hole until the grease begins to ooze from the ball groove Page 1792 Page 5546 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 10. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace stop lamp switch. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. INSPECTION END Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Classification: BR10-005 Reference: NTB10-081 Date: June 25, 2010 2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body or brake pads, ACTION: Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service. NOTE: The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed brake pad removal procedures. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially drain the brake fluid. ^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual. 2. Remove the front wheels. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal. Page 791 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Exploded View Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View AIR CLEANER FILTER Exploded View Page 291 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 5048 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 1031 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Replacement TRANSFER FLUID Replacement CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: . DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and gasket and drain the fluid. 3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket. 2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: . CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes.) 3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 1959 Locations Locations Page 325 Page 5563 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2171 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 1774 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 3915 Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Page 5554 Audible Warning Device: Locations Seat Belt Warning Chime WARNING CHIME SYSTEM SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Component Parts Location Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Power Consumption Control System Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Locations Page 1439 d. Install the bolts in the numerical order shown. e. After tightening, re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. 11. Install the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: The start and end of the application of the liquid gasket should be crossed at position (C) that cannot be seen after attaching the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover. D : 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. b. Install the bolts and tighten them to specification in the numerical order shown. - A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) - B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) 12. Install the crankshaft pulley. - Install the key of the crankshaft. - Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. Page 4234 Concept of auto active test - IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. - The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Locations Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Locations Procedures Quarter Window Glass: Procedures SIDE WINDOW GLASS Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Exploded View Timing Chain: Service and Repair Exploded View TIMING CHAIN Exploded View Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Coil Spring And Strut COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt using power tool. 3. Remove the three shock absorber upper nuts using power tool. 4. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly. Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - The lower seat step (2) in the shock absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle. - Upper spring insulator (3) - Arrow Indicates: Front - Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension . - When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. Rear Suspension SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack. Page 5213 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 3583 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 3197 Page 4736 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) MAGNET CLUTCH System Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature, refer to the following table. Page 5670 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Standard Pedal Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Standard Pedal BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment - Standard Pedal INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to the floor as shown. Tool number : - (J-46532) 2. Adjust the brake pedal height to specifications. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut (A) to specification. Page 3703 3. Inspection results (see Figures above): ^ OK - No further action required. ^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly. ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following information: Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN: IMPORTANT: Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation. PARTS INFORMATION ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed above. Page 2168 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 537 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812 Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Classification: EM-10-009 Reference: NTB10-094 Date: August 12, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure WARNING: Page 5825 Speedometer Module: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : Component Description Premium Without Navigation Amplifier: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation AUDIO AMP. Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the accelerator pedal. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Accelerator Pedal/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the audio amp. speaker amp. connectors. 4. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp. and bracket assembly screws and slide the audio amp. speaker amp. bracket assembly down. 5. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp.screws (A). then remove the audio amp. speaker amp. (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1789 Changing Differential Gear Oil Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Changing Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the front final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the front final drive assembly. 2. Fill the front final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified level near the filler plug hole. Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: . 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Page 3235 CAUTION: - Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. Avoid contact with eyes and skin. - Do not breath vapors or spray mist. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. 7. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose. 8. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 9. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose. 10. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 11. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose. 12. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection. A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris. a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended. b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm (0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is ended. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 2498 Page 1134 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 2907 Page 4823 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated Refrigerant. 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated Refrigerant. 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow OVERALL SEQUENCE DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 5059 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Component Function Check HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Component Function Check 1.CHECK FUNCTION Check that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original hand-held transmitter. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2 NO - Receiver or hand-held transmitter is malfunctioning. 2.CHECK ILLUMINATION 1. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 2. Press each of the transmitter buttons and watch for the red light to illuminate with each button. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Refer to See: Diagnosis Procedure. 3.CHECK TRANSMITTER Check transmitter with Tool*. *:For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Receiver or hand-held transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related. NO - Replace auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver). Diagnosis Procedure HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Description Homelink universal transceiver can store and transmit a maximum of 3 radio signals. Allows operation of garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security system, etc. Homelink universal transceiver power supply uses vehicle battery, which enables it to maintain every program in case battery is discharged or removed. HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Disconnect auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) connector. Page 3725 Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3. With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until threaded ends contact the brake pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap (C) is within specifications. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 110 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 5880 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Procedures Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front FRONT DISC BRAKE DISC ROTOR : Inspection VISUAL Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace as necessary. RUNOUT 1. Attach disc rotor to wheel hub using wheel nuts (at two or more positions). 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge placed at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge. Runout limit : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Disc Brake (with it attached to the vehicle) NOTE: Before measuring, make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection. 3. When runout exceeds limit value, displace mounting positions of disc rotor by one hole. And then find a position of the minimum value for runout. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above operation, turn disc rotor using Tool. Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 ( - ) THICKNESS Check thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace disc rotor if thickness is less than the wear limit. Page 5262 7. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. 8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle bracket and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the outside handle cable. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2004 Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base CAN Communication Signal Chart Information Bus: Application and ID CAN Communication Signal Chart CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CAN Communication Signal Chart Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnosis And Repair Work flow/How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart for how to use CAN communication signal chart. NOTE: Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List for the abbreviations of the connecting units. Locations Front Oil Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Oil Seal FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the transfer fluid. Refer to See: Fluid - Transfer Case/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2F1310. 3. Remove the companion flange self-lock nut using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( - ) 4. Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with the mark on the companion flange. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive shaft. Do not damage the front drive shaft. 5. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 6. Remove the front oil seal from the front case using Tool. Diagrams Windshield Washer Hose: Diagrams FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE Washer Tube Layout Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Symptom Table HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER MALFUNCTION Symptom Table Page 2067 Page 301 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4274 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4 Page 939 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation AIR CLEANER FILTER Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) REMOVAL NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. - Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: . 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 3261 Disclaimer Propeller Shaft 2F1310 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Propeller Shaft 2F1310 General Specification SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification Propeller Shaft Runout Propeller Shaft Joint Flex Effort Journal Axial Play Snap Ring SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Snap Ring Page 2531 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 4092 Page 5338 5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage. ^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found. 6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt. 7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal. ^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft) Page 1312 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ........................................................................................................................................................... API Certification Mark, SAE 5W-30 Page 2375 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 3381 Page 1740 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View SPARK PLUG Exploded View Page 186 Page 4461 8. Thread the outer sockets onto the inner sockets to the specified length "L", then tighten the lock nuts to the specification. Reconfirm that the tie-rod length "L" is within specification. Maximum inner socket length "L" : 115.2 mm (4.54 in) Specifications Fuel Injector: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Injector Page 1770 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Page 2741 a. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the fuel tube. CAUTION: Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. - Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. - Do not clean O-ring with solvent. - Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. - When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. b. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel damper. NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part. c. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube. CAUTION: Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up. - Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value :130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb) d. Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns. - After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube. 2. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below. CAUTION: Upper and lower O-rings are different. - Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. - Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. - Do not clean O-ring with solvent. - Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. - When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. - Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it. 3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube. a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. - Insert clip so that lug "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip. CAUTION: Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one. - Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. - Insert it while matching it to the axial center. - Insert fuel injector so that lug "B" of fuel tube matches notch "B" of the clip. Page 2622 Page 2639 Page 2971 Locations Page 4319 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4292 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Reference Value IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Reference Value VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL Page 3727 Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3. With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until the threaded ends contact the brake pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap (C) is within specifications. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 2858 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 1242 Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table. Undersize Bearings Usage Guide When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use undersize (US) bearings. - When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with the bearing installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Bearing undersize table CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft pins). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the main bearing housing grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block to the row in "Main Bearings Selection Table". Page 338 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension Wheel Alignment SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) Wheelarch Height SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) Locations Shift Indicator: Locations METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location Page 2542 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 4215 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2438 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 994 Disclaimer Page 3308 Tool number : SP8P INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal. Then drive the new front oil seal in evenly to the gear carrier using Tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse front oil seal. - Do not incline the new front oil seal when installing. - Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal. 2. Install the companion flange to the drive pinion while aligning the matching marks. 3. Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion lock nut. Then adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque using Tool A, and check the total preload torque using Tool B. - The total preload torque should be within the total preload torque specification. When not replacing the collapsible spacer, it should also be equal to the measurement taken during removal plus an additional 0.56 N.m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb). Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-004 Reference: NTB09-071 Date: August 4, 2009 TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) with V8 engine. IF YOU CONFIRM The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason; ACTION: Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin. CAUTION ^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs. CLAIMS INFORMATION Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminal And Reference Value ECM ECM Terminal and Reference Value PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 3959 ABLS/ABS Page 2579 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Locations Speedometer Module: Locations METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location Removal And Installation Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal And Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to See: Rear Door Window Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole. 3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon. 4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove. 5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 6. Remove the inside handle screws. Page 2784 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly Brake Pedal Assy: Recalls Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010 Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56, and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket. CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 5948 Fog/Driving Lamp: Adjustments FRONT FOG LAMP Aiming Adjustment The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure. - Place vehicle on level ground. - See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat. Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjustment screw. NOTE: Access adjustment screw from underneath front bumper. Use a T-3 (3 mm) Torx(R) bit or a 3 mm allen wrench to adjust. Turn screw clockwise to raise pattern and counterclockwise to lower pattern. 1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown. 2. Turn front fog lamps ON. Page 2487 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 1843 Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Locations Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 824 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). ABLS/ABS Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 1168 NOTE: See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover: CAUTION: ^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Page 333 Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Procedure After Replacing ECM INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Procedure After Replacing ECM When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function. 2. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. 4. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning. VIN Registration INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Page 4690 Blower Speed Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). Page 4573 2. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. 3. Remove the shock absorber. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Shock absorber upper and lower nuts : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Suspension Propeller Shaft 2F1310 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Propeller Shaft 2F1310 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Refrigerant Capacity................................................................................................................................................ .................................. 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54 ± 0.11 lb) Page 236 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2611 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 3977 Page 3380 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Propeller Shaft 3S1410 General Specification SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification 4WD Model Propeller Shaft Runout Journal Axial Play Propeller shaft Joint Flex Effort Snap Ring SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Snap Ring Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Removal and Installation Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. Page 4500 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Page 5570 Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1736 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 5545 Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 - Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 - 10A fuse - Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace ASCD brake switch. 7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK - GO TO 9. NG - GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 - Fuse block (J/B) connector M60 - 10A fuse - Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Page 324 With Intelligent Key System Starter Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 64 Page 506 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 5049 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1036 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ........................................................................................................................................................... API Certification Mark, SAE 5W-30 ABLS/ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Page 1694 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogramming" general procedure. Caution 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows: A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1). Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 290 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 3109 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 6200 ^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together. ^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. 3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue. Disclaimer Page 4952 FRONT RH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove RH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM for removal procedure. 2. Remove screw and seat cushion outer finisher. 3. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle. Page 1201 Standard : 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 in) Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) - (valve lifter diameter) Standard : 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 in) - If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head. INSTALLATION 1. Install the valve lifters if removed. Install removed parts in their original locations. 2. Install the camshafts. Use the table below for identification of the RH and LH, and intake and exhaust. - Install so that the RH bank (B) dowel pins (A) and LH bank (C) dowel pins (A) at the front of the camshaft face are in the direction shown. 3. Install the RH bank (B) and LH bank (D) camshaft brackets (A). Install by referring to the installation location mark (E) on the upper surface. - Install so that the installation location mark (E) can be correctly read when viewed from the intake manifold side (C). Page 192 Page 2782 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Procedures Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 3754 3. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to specification. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires. Disassembly and Assembly REAR DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. Page 2558 Page 3051 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4129 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Page 5505 Disclaimer Service Procedure 1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place. 2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate. ^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. CAUTION: The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with the lids snapped closed. 3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. Description and Operation Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Description FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin micro-filters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. Page 2199 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 5831 Tachometer: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM TACHOMETER : System Description The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). The ECM provides an engine speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 2897 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 3761 3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1). 4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed. ^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body. 5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service. Page 2310 d. Reception item of "BCM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means BCM cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between BCM and TCM (line 2-d in the figure below). e. Reception item of "EPS" and "I-KEY": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between EPS and I-KEY and their receiving units. Do not draw any line. NOTE: On CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST), "UNKWN" is indicated even though the item is not used in the trouble diagnosis. For the details of each item on CAN diagnostic support monitor, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis. Locations Oil Pressure Gauge: Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 3158 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF) CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: Maintenance. 1. Before driving, the A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid temperatures of 30° to 50° C (86° to 122° F) using the "COLD" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the "P" position. c. Check the A/T fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a cloth. e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe as shown. CAUTION: To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the A/T fluid level. If the A/T fluid level is at low side of range, add A/T fluid to the transmission through the A/T fluid charging pipe. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with A/T fluid. g. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and the A/T fluid level gauge bolt. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 2. Warm up the engine and transmission. 3. Check for any A/T fluid leaks. 4. Drive the vehicle to increase the A/T fluid temperature to 80° C (176° F). 5. Allow the A/T fluid temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-III to monitor the A/T fluid temperature as follows: Page 1657 ^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above. Page 2162 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1482 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (RH). 3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Locations Page 3983 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Locations Page 2099 Page 1455 EM-7 Page 2260 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 1305 OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 817 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Testing and Inspection Radiator: Testing and Inspection RADIATOR Checking Radiator Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. - When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces. 3. Stop washing when dirt and debris no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces until no water sprays out. Page 1665 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated/missing band clamp(s). ^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed. Page 934 Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4502 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Page 3957 WARNING: Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, never touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. - Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. - Add distilled water up to the MAX level. Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been "sulphated", note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. 2. Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. Page 5607 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector M25. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M25 terminal 52 and ground, and connector M24 terminal 9 and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Check ground harness. BCM (Body Control Module) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) : Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM. 3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Page 3154 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .............................. Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF* * If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer control device. 4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 2. Install the transfer control device. a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a mark on the control shift rod. Page 4507 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 1020 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Differential Gear Oil Changing Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly. 2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified level near the filler plug hole. Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: . 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Front Final Drive M205 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not leaking from the front final drive assembly or around it. Page 5805 REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 5463 a. Starting at the top of the seat back board pull the top down and away from the seat back. See Figure 2. b. Pull the middle part of the seat back board away from the seat back to disengage the middle 2 tabs. c. Pull bottom of the seat back board away from the seat back. NOTE: A trim tool can be used to assist in the removal of the 2 bottom clips. 8. Install the seat back board: a. Install 2 new clips at the bottom and push the seat back board in until it clicks into place. b. Locate the 2 tabs at the top and push in the seat back board until it is securely in place. c. Press in the seat back board at the 2 tabs located on the side until it clicks into place. Module B (for hard seat backs) 1 Move / adjust the right front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position. 2. Remove the right front hard seat back board as follows: NOTE: The seat back board is held on with: Page 2808 Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Page 2345 - Models with floor shift - Models with column shift Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the A/T assembly and the harness connector F14. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors E50 and B75. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors E5 and E50. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors B37 and B200. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the driver seat control unit. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors B75 and B37. Main Line Between DIFF And DLC Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN DIFF AND DLC CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector B69 Page 430 9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for reassembly. Page 1152 Disclaimer Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 203 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 4383 Alignment: Service and Repair ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Front Wheel Alignment PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to See: Suspension/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection . 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheelarch Height. GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. - Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER AND CASTER 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber and caster : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment. NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. Page 5560 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 5297 4. Install the cable securely to the lock. 5. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood opener operation. Page 4802 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Pipe LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 4923 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always follow the tightening sequence shown. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "[=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag). Page 792 Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 1890 Page 3484 2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to specification. Page 2468 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Page 2337 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 14) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 14) Page 2320 6. The circuit which has the most amount of lines are the possible cause. Error is detected from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line (shaded in the figure below). NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List. 7. Perform the inspection procedure for the possible cause. Refer to "MALFUNCTION AREA CHART". Page 5181 8. Disconnect the harness clips from the black steel bumper. 9. Remove the rear bumper reinforcement. 10. Remove the sonar sensor retainers from the rear bumper, if equipped. 11. Remove the sonar sensors and harness from the rear bumper, if equipped. - Disconnect the sonar sensors from harness. 12. Remove the license lamp harness from the rear bumper. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Apply sealant to clips securing upper step pad during installation. Page 2152 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 1821 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Tools and Equipment Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool AST tool# 8026 5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to 2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models - 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool - Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction - See Application Chart - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set. Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Page 4426 - Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed. - To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification. Warning Chime System Audible Warning Device: Locations Warning Chime System WARNING CHIME SYSTEM WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Component Parts Location Exploded View Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View SPARK PLUG Exploded View Locations Page 2333 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 10) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 10) Page 2900 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 916 - Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. Page 1333 EM-5 Page 4142 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 6011 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3936 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2297 Symptom When Error Occurs In CAN Communication System TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, multiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode. ERROR EXAMPLE NOTE: Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring. - Refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List for the unit abbreviation. Example: TCM branch line open circuit Page 6123 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Power Window Switch Rear Door Switch REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation - Rear Door Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear power window switch assembly from the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear power window switch (2) from the power window switch finisher (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Power Drop Glass Switch REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation - Power Drop Glass Switch REMOVAL 1. Release the pawls and remove the overhead console switch panel (1) from the overhead console (2). 2. Disconnect the power drop glass switch (3). 3. Remove the power drop glass switch (3) from the overhead console switch panel (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool. CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4686 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 125 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System System Diagram SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Diagram System Description SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System Description. Base Audio Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Base Audio AUDIO UNIT Removal and Installation AUDIO UNIT Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect the audio unit connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 565 Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Page 2503 Page 3020 Page 182 Page 4078 Concept of auto active test - IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully. - The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 679 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 5041 DVD Player: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Removal and Installation DVD PLAYER Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the center console bin. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 3. Remove the DVD player screws. 4. Remove the DVD player. Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. VIDEO MONITOR Removal 1. Remove the rear roof console assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector. 3. Remove the video housing screws. 4. Remove the video monitor and housing. 5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor. Page 1001 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF) CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: . 1. Before driving, the A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid temperatures of 30° to 50° C (86° to 122° F) using the "COLD" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the "P" position. c. Check the A/T fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a cloth. e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe as shown. CAUTION: To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the A/T fluid level. If the A/T fluid level is at low side of range, add A/T fluid to the transmission through the A/T fluid charging pipe. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with A/T fluid. g. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and the A/T fluid level gauge bolt. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 2. Warm up the engine and transmission. 3. Check for any A/T fluid leaks. 4. Drive the vehicle to increase the A/T fluid temperature to 80° C (176° F). 5. Allow the A/T fluid temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-III to monitor the A/T fluid temperature as follows: Page 2109 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5147 Disclaimer Page 3430 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The combination meter indicates the received shift position. Page 3623 8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 13. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Page 4954 7. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on seat pan. 8. Install connector attachment clip to seat bracket to attach buckle assy. to seat. 9. Reinstall seat cushion outer finisher. 10. Install seat in reverse order of removal. 11. Reconnect the battery cables (positive cable first). 12. Operate all switches to make sure everything works as it should. Locations Page 4723 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 3340 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 3. Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown. CAUTION: The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. - Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 in) deep]. CAUTION: Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft. - Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft surface. Page 5719 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 5264 Page 2898 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 4493 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6024 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 3344 - Move joint up, down, left, right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness. - Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage. - If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel nuts to specification. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. Disassembly and Assembly Front Drive Shaft DRIVE SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Final Drive Side 1. Mount the drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the vise and the drive shaft. 2. Remove the boot bands. Locations Page 2044 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER TANK Washer Fluid Reservoir REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove side washer fluid reservoir screw (2). - Front and rear washer motor (1). 2. Remove front and rear washer motor connector. 3. Remove washer fluid level sensor connector. 4. Disconnect front and rear washer hoses. 5. Remove front washer fluid reservoir screw (2). 6. Remove washer fluid reservoir (1) from the vehicle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, add washer fluid up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet and check for leaks. Page 4074 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION - IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. - IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. - If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times. NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays "Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. Page 2376 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 2557 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 2445 Page 5945 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Locations Page 840 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Exploded View Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Exploded View INTAKE MANIFOLD Exploded View Page 4042 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS components. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS components. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5657 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Locations Page 1752 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1351 8. Remove access cover 9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft. Tool number: ( - ) J47245 a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool. - Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in). 10. Remove the front cover. a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. Page 1224 Page 5331 5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage. ^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found. 6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt. 7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal. ^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft) Page 965 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Pipe HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 328 Page 2655 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Removal And Installation EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 5. Remove the drive belts. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2). Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number : - (J-44626) CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors - Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. 7. Remove the front cross bar. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (LH). 9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below. a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Page 4672 1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2. 2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2. 3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1. 4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal. 5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved. Locations Page 4327 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 372 Starter Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 4757 When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM. BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. Discharge Air Flow MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Discharge Air Flow Switches And Their Control Function MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Switches And Their Control Function Power Consumption Control System Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 1527 Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Refrigerant Capacity................................................................................................................................................ .................................. 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54 ± 0.11 lb) Page 4336 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 1844 Page 2269 CAN System - Part 4 Page 680 Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 4272 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2 Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 5899 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Procedures Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly. Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Page 5216 8. Remove the door lock knob. 9. Remove the rear door tweeter speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR - KING CAB Removal 1. Remove the upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System. 2. Release the clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove the armrest. 4. Remove the screws behind armrest. 5. Release the clips and remove rear door finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bolt Connecting Rod Page 431 10. Remove the outboard J-Clip. WARNING: Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. 11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly. Page 3165 - White Arrow Indicates Vehicle front - Black Arrow Indicates Oil pan bolts - Clips (1) - Drain plug (3) CAUTION: Be sure the oil drain plug is located to the rear of the transmission assembly. - Before installing oil pan bolts, remove any traces of old sealant from the sealing surfaces and threaded holes. - Do not reuse old gasket, replace with a new one. - Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing. - Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of the gasket. 3. Install oil pan bolts and clips tighten in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts : 7.9 N.m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) 4. Install drain plug with new gasket to oil pan and tighten to specification. Drain plug : 34 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. 5. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 4364 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 2271 CAN System - Part 6 Page 820 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 4437 System Diagram Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 2727 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 3743 3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1). 4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed. ^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body. 5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service. M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 1817 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2545 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2338 Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 15) DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 15) Page 5777 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 3461 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Belt. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) Page 5509 13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert. ^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench. ^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece. CAUTION: Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer. 14. Make sure the organizer sides freely. ^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose: a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the end of the plastic insert. System Diagram Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 4077 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Diagnosis Description DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) Diagnosis Description AUTO ACTIVE TEST Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator - Oil pressure gauge - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure, "KING CAB See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine. Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times. Page 2433 Page 4114 Locations Page 5688 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. Refer to See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover and oil pump drive spacer. INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new front oil seal. 2. Install the front oil seal. - Install the front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. - Press-fit until the height of the front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. - Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal. 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5709 Page 232 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 855 Alignment: Service and Repair ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Front Wheel Alignment PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection . 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheelarch Height. GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. - Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER AND CASTER 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber and caster : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment. NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. Bulb Replacement Brake Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement STOP LAMP Bulb Replacement HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Removal 1. Remove the high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to See: Removal And Installation. 2. Turn bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it from lamp housing. 3. Pull bulb from socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5716 Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection ASCD INDICATOR Component Description ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. CRUISE indicator is illuminated. - SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to See: Cruise Control/Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function. ASCD INDICATOR Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U1000/Electronic Engine Control. 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function. OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Go to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/How To Check Terminal and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. - INSPECTION END Page 2424 Page 4936 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Fold rear seat backs down. 2. Remove bolts and remove tether anchors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3121 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1816 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 57 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Maintenance Item Programing Locations Page 4230 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION - IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. - IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation coil circuit. - If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times. NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays "Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped. STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds. Page 799 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 2939 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description Page 5196 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Component Structure FRONT DOOR LOCK Component Structure Page 1596 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. 5. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3849 Do not reuse the grommets. 2. Install the reservoir tank onto the master cylinder assembly. 3. Install the fluid level sensor on the reservoir tank. 4. Install the new front and rear pressure sensors. CAUTION: Do not reuse the front and rear pressure sensors. Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Classification: EL07-038B Reference: NTB08-039B Date: January 19, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only IF YOU CONFIRM The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch. WARNING: ^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip of the seat bottom cover. ^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. ^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure Page 2211 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 1350 Exploded View Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above. 2. Remove variable timing control solenoids. 3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors. 4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket. 5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. 6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. Page 6139 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 2170 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2346 - Harness connector M40 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness connectors. Differential lock control unit - Harness connectors B69 and M40 2. Check the continuity between the differential lock control unit harness connector and the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the differential lock control unit and the harness connector B69. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the differential lock control unit and the data link connector. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector M40 and the data link connector. Main Line Between DIFF And ADP Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN DIFF AND ADP CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the following harness connectors. ECM - Differential lock control unit - Harness connectors B37 and B200 4. Check the continuity between the differential lock control unit harness connector and the harness connector. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. Page 1720 Page 5007 Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation MICROPHONE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front roof console finisher. Refer to XXXX. 2. Disconnect the Bluetooth microphone connector (A). 3. Detach the Bluetooth microphone (1) from the front roof console finisher and remove the Bluetooth microphone (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3726 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection Adjustable Pedal BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment - Adjustable Pedal INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to the floor as shown. Tool number : - (J-46532) 2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forward most (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning them 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten the lock nut (A) to specification. Page 1573 Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Thermostat and Thermostat Housing THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Exploded View Front Final Drive M205 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Front Final Drive M205 CARRIER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Final Drive M205. 2. Remove the carrier cover bolts and separate the carrier cover from the gear carrier using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface. - Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply 3 mm (0.12 in) bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 2. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205. 3. Install the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Final Drive M205. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Changing Differential Gear Oil. Page 5565 Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams Warning Chime System WARNING CHIME SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Warning Chime - Part 1 Page 4086 Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 89 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 5553 Audible Warning Device: Locations Light Reminder Warning Chime WARNING CHIME SYSTEM LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Component Parts Location Page 3990 Starter Motor: Description and Operation Starter STARTER MOTOR Starter Page 5606 Audible Warning Device: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Meter POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK FUSES Check for blown combination meter fuses. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2 NO - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24. 2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 1, 8, 24 and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Check harness for open between combination meter and fuse. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Page 2518 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 1100 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Automatic Air Conditioner Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 2151 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. With Intelligent Key System Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 3009 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 915 - G: No. 6 cylinder - H: No. 8 cylinder - J: No. 1 cylinder - K: No. 3 cylinder - L: No. 5 cylinder - M: No. 7 cylinder 11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance: Page 309 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 4108 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 5457 12. Remove and replace the switch. 13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan. 14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto the seat frame. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9. WARNING: Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. 15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs. 16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8 Kg-m, 20 ft-lb). 17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan. 18. Re-attach the lower flap cover. Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5018 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair SONAR SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear sonar sensor (1) from the rear bumper (2). 2. Disconnect the rear sonar sensor connector. 3. Remove the rear sonar sensor housing from the rear bumper (2). INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4015 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service Precautions POWER SOCKET Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 3024 Page 6134 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 2089 Page 5214 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove the screw. 4. Remove the pull handle escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screw behind armrest. 6. Remove the window crank handle, using a suitable tool (if equipped). 7. Remove the memory seat switch (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector. 8. Remove the step lamp. Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 4942 Removal - Crew Cab 1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly. On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor. 3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector. Installation - Crew Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first. - Make sure seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation. Removal - King Cab 1. Remove D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 2. Remove anchor cover and bolt. 3. Remove lower finisher. 4. Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector. 5. Remove seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Installation - King Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal - Bucket Seat 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher. Page 4130 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness. Page 1355 - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. Page 4662 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 2187 Page 4822 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: MAX position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F)] - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Page 1177 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (RH). 3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 2407 Page 3392 - Arrow Indicates Front - While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the joint as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, repair or replace the journal parts. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification. - Check the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Propeller Shaft 2S1410. - If propeller shaft assembly or final drive assembly has been replaced,connect them as follows: - Face companion flange mark (A) of the final drive (1) upward. With the mark (A) faced upward, couple the propeller shaft and the final drive so that the matching mark (B) of the propeller shaft (2) can be positioned as closest as possible with the matching mark (C) of the final drive companion flange. - Tighten propeller shaft and final drive bolts and nuts to specifications. Refer to "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Propeller Shaft 3S1410 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT Removal and Installation 4WD Models (long wheel base) Page 4073 - Erase DTC. - Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time. NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. - Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10 10. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO TO 6 OK - Inspection End. IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Fail Safe Page 307 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 2474 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 806 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. A/T Shift Lock System Locations Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Page 5296 Hood Latch: Removal and Replacement HOOD Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control REMOVAL 1. Remove the front grill. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to See: Fender/Front Fender/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hoodledge. 4. Remove the bolt and the hood opener. 5. Remove the grommet from the dash lower, and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable. INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the hole in dash lower panel into the engine room. Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more. 2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and from inside the vehicle, push the grommet into the dash lower hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at (*) mark. Locations Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow OVERALL SEQUENCE DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data. Page 1449 EM-1 Page 4951 7. Install seat belt buckle and bolt. 8. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on the seat pan. 9. Install seat cushion outer fininsher. 10. Install seat in reverse order of removal. Page 2217 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1802 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 5167 2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 4. Remove the cover from the engine. Disclaimer Page 1331 EM-3 Page 1764 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Rear Window Defogger System Page 2295 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor CONSULT-III and CAN diagnostic support monitor (on-board diagnosis function) are used for detecting root cause. MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III) Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication Without PAST With PAST MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS) Page 4140 Page 4318 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 1473 - B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) 5. Install the crankshaft pulley. - Install the key of the crankshaft. - Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. - Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt. - Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb) Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening) 7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. A/F Sensor 1 Heater Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A/F Sensor 1 Heater Page 3438 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake/Exploded View (front disc brake), See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake/Exploded View (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. Page 3787 Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused. 2. Install cylinder body (2) and tighten sliding pin bolts (1) to specification. CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to specification. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires. Page 3191 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 1723 Page 332 Page 3838 - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 3222 REMOVAL Floor shift 1. Remove negative battery terminal. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove A/T finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/A/T Finisher. 3. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. 4. Disconnect selector control cable. 5. Remove control device assembly. Column shift 1. Remove the column shift control. 2. Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin. INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position. Refer to See: Adjustments See: Procedures. Adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Adjustments See: Procedures. Page 5060 2. Check voltage between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) harness connector and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2 NO - Check the following. 10A fuse [No. 19 located in the fuse block (J/B)] - Harness for open or short between fuse and auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver). 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) harness connector and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness. 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. - INSPECTION END. Page 1330 EM-2 Page 5914 2. Rotate footwell lamp socket (3) counterclockwise from bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Release the pawls and remove bulb shield (1) from bracket. 3. Pull bulb (2) straight out from footwell lamp socket (3) to remove. Footwell lamp bulb : 12V - 3.4W Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 1690 Locations Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2589 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 883 Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation Short Wheel Base Long Wheel Base Page 3716 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1585 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 2380 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Locations Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 5569 Warning Chime - Part 5 Combination Meter COMBINATION METER Wiring Diagram Page 4850 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 4491 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Page 4321 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 793 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 2363 Knock Sensor: Locations Page 1494 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. Page 3596 Page 3025 Page 2054 Page 2242 Page 1398 6. Remove the rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage crankshaft or oil seal retainer surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new rear oil seal. 2. Install the rear oil seal. - Install the rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. - Press-fit the rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the crankshaft or cylinder block. - Press-fit the oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. - Do not touch grease applied onto the oil seal lip. - Do not damage or scratch the outer circumference of the rear oil seal. - Tap until flattened with the front edge of the oil seal retainer. 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly, CAUTION: When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly. - Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drivetrain components. Page 4080 Monitor item ACTIVE TEST Test item Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair REAR OIL SEAL Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410. 2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 3. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models). Installation 1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush into the rear extension case (2WD models) using Tool or adapter case (4WD models) using suitable tool. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) CAUTION: Apply ATF to rear oil seal. - Do not reuse rear oil seal. 2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models). Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 3. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410. Page 886 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 3702 2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3 below for photos of OK and NG, conditions. Page 3114 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Locations Page 5600 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Key Warning Chime System Diagram WARNING CHIME SYSTEM KEY WARNING CHIME : System Diagram System Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM KEY WARNING CHIME : System Description With the key inserted into the key switch, and the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position, when driver's door is opened, the warning chime will sound. BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter with CAN communication line. - When combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime. Component Description WARNING CHIME SYSTEM KEY WARNING CHIME : Component Description Page 4049 Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 3396 ASSEMBLY Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select new snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/Snap Ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap rings NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/General Specification. Page 553 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 2901 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 4503 Service and Repair Front Bumper: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation STEEL BUMPER Removal 1. Remove the front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the engine under cover or skid plate. 3. Remove the fog lamp (if equipped). Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Fog/Driving Lamp/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 4. Remove the front bumper side bracket nuts. 5. Remove the front bumper assembly. 6. Remove the front bumper opening finisher clips C103 and remove the front bumper opening finisher. 7. Remove the front bumper RH and LH side finishers. 8. Remove the front bumper brackets LH and RH. 9. Remove the front bumper stays LH and RH. Page 4385 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B". Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Steering/Specifications/Steering Outer Socket And Inner Socket c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Lock nut : Refer See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Overhaul FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment - Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. Page 1135 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position. NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Premium Without Navigation Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Removal and Installation SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Removal 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna connector. 3. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut. 4. Remove the satellite radio antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3576 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description Page 2583 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 1457 EM-10 Electrical Units Location Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Page 4028 Fuse: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Locations Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 4475 Turning torque "B" : 0.5 - 6.4 N.m (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 in-lb) Vertical End Play Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play "C" : 0 mm (0 in) Page 117 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Wiring Diagram IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1 Page 1969 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Service and Repair Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair BUZZER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the combination meter cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID A/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the two bolts (1), disconnect the connector (2) and remove the front buzzer. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 660 Page 3732 Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3. With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until the threaded ends contact the brake pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap (C) is within specifications. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 1810 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 2098 CAUTION 2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin applies as follows. A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1): ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 944 6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins. Page 951 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Page 1257 Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal) Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Arm Rest: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Classification: BT08-037 Reference: NTB09-005 Date: January 15, 2009 FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front driver seat armrest is loose. ACTION Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position. b. Fully recline the driver seatback. Page 2359 NOTE: ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first. 4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the "Symptom (Results from interview with customer)" are reproduced. NOTE: Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms. Inspection result Reproduced - Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure. Non-reproduced - Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected. Page 3796 3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1). 4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed. ^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body. 5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service. Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Page 5776 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 3755 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air into union bolt hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Using a suitable tool, remove piston seal from cylinder body as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder body inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder body for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair . 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 2. Install the inside seal. 3. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. FITTING INSPECTION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Page 428 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 4. CAUTION: Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle it with care. 4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body. 5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench. 6. Remove the lower flap cover. Page 1691 Page 2261 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1123 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 4339 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 5611 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the seat belt buckle switch LH connector. 3. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH. Component Function Check KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Component Function Check 1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL Select "DATA MONITOR" for "BCM" and check the "KEY ON SW" monitor value. - Inspection End. Diagnosis Procedure KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Description Transmits a key switch signal to the BCM. KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure COLUMN SHIFT 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. NO - GO TO 2 2.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Page 4231 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Page 4338 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 1783 Page 4405 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 3112 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 3715 3. Inspection results (see Figures above): ^ OK - No further action required. ^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly. ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following information: Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN: IMPORTANT: Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation. PARTS INFORMATION ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed above. Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 2500 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (LH). 5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 722 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 1147 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nut Torque: 133 N.m (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb) When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Locations Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location Locations Page 54 - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 2122 Page 864 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 2577 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Technician Safety Information Information Bus: Technician Safety Information PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the "SRS AIRBAG". - Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 5370 LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER Removal 1. Remove the push pin from lower dash side finisher. 2. Remove the front kicking plate. 3. Remove the lower dash side finisher and front kicking plate together. 4. Remove the lower dash side finisher from front kicking plate. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER Removal 1. Remove the seat belt lower anchor. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System. - On RH side, disconnect seat belt tension sensor. 2. Remove the front and rear kicking plates. 3. Remove the center pillar lower finisher. Installation Page 3944 Starter Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Locations Page 1666 Page 4749 AUTO SWITCH The compressor, intake door, air mix doors, outlet doors and blower speed are automatically controlled so that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature selected by the operator. - When pressing AUTO switch, air inlet, air outlet, blower speed, and discharge air temperature are automatically controlled. TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (DRIVER) Increases or decreases the set temperature. TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (PASSENGER) Increases or decreases the set temperature. - When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. - When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. - REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor position. Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position, and turns A/C compressor ON. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (CREW CAB) When switch is ON, rear window and door mirrors are defogged. OFF SWITCH The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot (75% foot and 25% defrost) position. BLOWER CONTROL DIAL The blower speed is manually controlled with this dial. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.) MODE SWITCHES Controls the air discharge outlets. DUAL SWITCH When the DUAL switch indicator is illuminated, the driver and passenger temperature can each be set independently. - When the DUAL switch indicator is not illuminated, the driver temperature setting is applied to both sides. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Service and Repair Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the four screws (A) securing the front air control unit (1) to cluster lid D (2). 4. Remove the front air control unit (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Procedures Brake Fluid: Procedures BRAKE FLUID On Board Inspection LEVEL CHECK Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is between MAX and MIN lines as shown. - Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. - If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. - If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake system for fluid leaks. Locations Page 1270 - G: No. 6 cylinder - H: No. 8 cylinder - J: No. 1 cylinder - K: No. 3 cylinder - L: No. 5 cylinder - M: No. 7 cylinder 11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance: Page 3400 3. Remove the snap rings. 4. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or yoke hole. 5. Remove the bearing at the opposite side of above operation. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. Center Support Bearing 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 2. Put matching marks on the propeller shaft tube and the slip yoke. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the propeller shaft tube or slip yoke. 3. Remove and discard the clamp near the center support bearing, then slide the slip yoke off of propeller shaft tube. 4. Press the center support bearing off the propeller shaft tube using Tool and suitable hydraulic press. Tool number : 205-D002 Page 2300 Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart Page 4162 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Page 4280 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System System Diagram POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM System Description OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status. - IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication. Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active. - CAN transmission is stopped. SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION - IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication. - Front wiper fail-safe operation - Outputting signals to actuators - Switches or relays operating - Auto active test is starting - Emergency OFF - Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication. - IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled. WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start. - Ignition switch ON - An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication. Page 1819 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1953 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 3053 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2263 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1625 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Installation of Thermostat Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber ring as shown. - Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings, then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation holes. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. With Intelligent Key System Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 6202 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Service and Repair Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 3. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System. 4. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 6. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipes from the expansion valve. 7. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 8. Remove the steering column. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair. 9. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. 10. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 11. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Page 2546 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 5523 8. Remove bulb seal and door seal from storage box. 9. Remove storage box from surround assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2484 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 727 Page 1479 Page 927 Drive Belt: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Filters/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown. Tool number : - (J-46535) CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys. - Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. Locations Bulb Replacement Marker Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement REAR COMBINATION LAMP Bulb Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamp bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2469 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Locations Locations Page 1731 Attachment General Procedure Page 384 Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Page 495 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Fog/Driving Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 1244 Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal) Page 3157 A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 21 Remote Control Module: Locations Hands-Free Phone System Page 4079 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R) APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R. SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. DATA MONITOR Page 3762 IMPORTANT: If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform. Page 1832 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 2764 - Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. - Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. 4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts. - Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts "a" to "b" in illustration and in two steps. 5. Install fuel hose assembly. Follow precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring. - Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent O-ring from being damaged. - Tighten bolts evenly in several steps. - Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts. 6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections using the following steps. 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. WARNING: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot. NOTE: Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 1847 Page 2100 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 2210 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 248 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4248 Page 2093 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 1637 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Removal And Installation EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 5. Remove the drive belts. Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2). Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number : - (J-44626) CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. 7. Remove the front cross bar. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (LH). 9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below. a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly. c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using power tool. Page 6029 Page 4708 1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2. 2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2. 3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1. 4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal. 5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved. IN-Vehicle Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the in-vehicle sensor (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5206 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 3863 NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows. 1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 2. Perform parking brake break-in operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following conditions: Vehicle speed at 40 km/h (25 MPH) - Apply parking brake with an operating force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 lb-f) set - Apply parking brake for a period of 30 seconds CAUTION: To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in operation. - Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of lining. 3. After break-in operation, check pedal stroke of parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified stroke. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. Page 1376 Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE OIL PUMP REGULATOR VALVE ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 5150 Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery TOW TRUCK TOWING Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. Page 811 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 215 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Locations Page 2213 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION System Diagram Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram Page 2812 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 2673 DRAIN FILTER 1. Check visually for insect nests in the drain filter air inlet. 2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. 4. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B. 5. Block port B. 6. Blow air into port A and check that there is no leakage. 7. If NG, replace drain filter. Page 4853 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 173 Page 4692 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM System Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Blower speed control system components are: Front air control - Variable blower control - Front blower motor relay - Front blower motor - Intake sensor System Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control (1) receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). Locations Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Capacity with reservoir ........................................................................................................................ ............................................. 3-1/4 U.S. Gal. (12.2 L) Page 4594 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly during servicing. 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. Page 5562 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer control device. 4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. 2. Install the transfer control device. a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a mark on the control shift rod. Page 1124 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 825 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF) CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See: Maintenance. 1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge. 4. Drain the A/T fluid from the drain plug hole, then install the drain plug with a new gasket. Refill the transmission with new A/T fluid. Always refill with the same volume as the drained A/T fluid. Use the A/T fluid level gauge to check the A/T fluid level as shown. Add A/T fluid as necessary. Drain plug : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component. - To flush out the old A/T fluid from the transmission oil coolers, pour new A/T fluid into the A/T fluid charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old A/T fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. - When the color of the A/T fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new A/T fluid, flushing out the old A/T fluid is complete. The amount of new A/T fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% increase of the specified capacity. A/T fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance. CAUTION: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. - Using ATF fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. - When filling the transmission with A/T fluid, do not spill the A/T fluid on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust parts. - Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. 5. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification. A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 6. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). 7. Check the fluid level and condition. If the A/T fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 6. 8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe and install the A/T fluid level gauge bolt. 9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification. Page 4422 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Leakage Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear. Page 2732 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation FUEL INJECTOR Component Description The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. Page 2207 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1737 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 237 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 1905 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Locations Page 5985 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Locations Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Classification: EM09-001A Reference: NTB09-040A Date: May 14, 2010 NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. SERVICE INFORMATION In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color. NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC. ^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. ^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5 years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills. Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct www.NissanChemicals.com. ^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted: P/N 999MP - LP25500P > The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water. > Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC. Page 4170 Power Socket - Part 3 Page 1695 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Procedures Steering Wheel: Procedures STEERING WHEEL On-Vehicle Inspection and Service CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION Check installation condition of steering gear assembly, front suspension, axle and steering column. - Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial direction. End play of the axial direction for steering wheel : 0 mm (0 in) - Check if the mounting nuts for steering gear assembly are loose. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY 1. Turn tires straight ahead, start engine, then turn steering wheel to the left and right lightly, and measure steering wheel movement on the outer circumference when steering wheel is turned up to the point where tires start moving. Steering wheel play on the outer circumference : 0 - 35 mm (0 - 1.38 in) CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL Check neutral position on steering wheel after confirming that front wheel alignment is correct. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair. 1. Turn tires straight ahead, check if steering wheel is in the neutral position. 2. If it is not in the neutral position, remove steering wheel and reinstall it correctly. 3. If the neutral position cannot be attained by repositioning the steering wheel two teeth or less on steering stem, loosen tie-rod lock nuts of steering outer sockets, then adjust tie-rods by the same amount in the opposite direction. CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE 1. Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake. 2. Start engine. 3. Bring power steering fluid up to operating temperature of 60° 80°C (140° - 176°F). 4. Tires need to be inflated to specified pressure. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. 5. Check steering wheel turning force using Tool when steering wheel has been turned 360° from the neutral position. Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Page 2453 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Adjustments Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE Washer Nozzle Adjustment - This vehicle is equipped with non-adjustable washer nozzles. - If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed correctly. - If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory, replace washer nozzle. Page 2128 Page 4553 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 3245 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 4510 Page 4055 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Locations Page 2316 2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST) of units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit. NOTE: For the details of each indication on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis. a. Reception item of "ECM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means ECM could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between ECM and ABS (line 2-a in the figure below). b. Reception item of "M&A;": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means M&A; could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS (line 2-b in the figure below). c. Reception item of "TCM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means TCM could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between TCM and ABS (line 2-c in the figure below). Page 1405 - Install the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10115600 (J-38958) - Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip. - Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H". Page 2888 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector. 4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 6082 Combination Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING and TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Page 4354 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. System Diagram Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM VOLTAGE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 5274 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 5615 Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace key switch. FLOOR SHIFT 1.CHECK KEY SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. 3. Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. Page 4190 Page 3858 Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Removal and Installation PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. On models with floor shift, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 3. Remove floor trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 4. Remove adjusting nut and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. 5. Remove the lock plate from the front cable. 6. Remove front cable retaining bolts and nut. 7. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. 8. Disconnect right and left rear cables from equalizer. 9. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 10. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. Refer to See: Parking Brake Shoe/Service and Repair. 11. Remove right and left rear cables retaining bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Adjust parking brake. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. Page 6145 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Page 3246 Valve Body: Service and Repair CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to See: Fluid A/T/Service and Repair/Changing A/T Fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 1803 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 2008 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 2563 Page 3280 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Belt. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) Page 4642 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Motor MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Mode Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3076 Page 5093 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation AUDIO UNIT Removal and Installation AUDIO UNIT Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect the audio unit connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AV SWITCH Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the AV switch screws. 4. Carefully remove the AV switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Upper Link Control Arm: Service and Repair Upper Link UPPER LINK Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 3. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. Support lower link with jack. Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 4. Remove fender protector. 5. Remove upper link bolts and nuts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension . CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of upper link ball joint nut. When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. - After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair . Page 4212 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 2613 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 2033 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 2544 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 957 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to See: Fluids/Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required. Page 1725 Page 2914 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Description and Operation Compass: Description and Operation COMPASS Description DESCRIPTION With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the mode or (N) switch ON, the compass display will indicate the direction the vehicle is heading. Vehicle direction is displayed as follows: N: north - E: east - S: south - W: west ZONE VARIATION SETTING PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geographical north can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. This difference is known as variance. In order for the compass to operate properly (accurately) in a particular zone, the zone variation must be calibrated using the following procedure. Zone Variation Chart Page 1793 Page 4641 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Intake Door Motor INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Intake Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 358 Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 3722 CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor) for pedal height adjustment. Engine Controls - DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM Classification: EC08-013B Reference: NTB08-060B Date: May 20, 2009 2008 - 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0133 / P0153 This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information and Service Procedure have been updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2009 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0133 and/or P0153 (A/F Sensor 1) is stored in the ECM and There are no drivability issues, ACTIONS 1. Refer to Step 2 in the Service Procedure to confirm this bulletin applies to the vehicle you are working on. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table above. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 3394 3S1410/General Specification. - While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play : 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less - Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. - If propeller shaft assembly of final drive assembly has been replaced, connect them as follows: - Face companion flange mark (A) of the final drive (1) upward. With the mark (A) faced upward, couple the propeller shaft and the final drive so that the matching mark (B) of the propeller shaft (2) can be positioned as close as possible with the matching mark (C) of the final drive companion flange. - Tighten propeller shaft and final drive bolts and nuts of the to specification. Refer to "Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Page 1999 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation AIR CLEANER FILTER Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) REMOVAL NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. - Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: Maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 2584 Page 4213 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 3624 2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to specification. Page 77 Speedometer Module: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : Component Description Page 250 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 2190 Page 863 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Exploded View Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exploded View EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Exploded View Page 3469 Control Module: Service and Repair TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) - After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement. Page 4489 Page 985 Coolant: Testing and Inspection ENGINE COOLANT Inspection LEVEL CHECK Check if the engine coolant reservoir tank level is within MIN to MAX level when engine is cool. - Adjust engine coolant level as necessary. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS WARNING: Never remove the radiator or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator or reservoir. - To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system at the reservoir filler neck using suitable tool and Tool. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. NOTE: In case that engine coolant decreases, replenish cooling system with engine coolant. If any concerns are found, repair or replace damaged parts. CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP Check reservoir cap relief pressure using suitable tool and Tool. Page 4488 Page 2717 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position. NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 1101 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 5281 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 5105 Removal and Installation REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab. 2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab. 2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear door tweeter connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3891 - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Locations Locations Page 247 Page 4335 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 222 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 953 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 3271 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 CARRIER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain the differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Differential Gear Oil/Changing Differential Gear Oil. 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable (A) and brake tube (B) from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the carrier cover bolts and separate the carrier cover from the gear carrier using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface. - Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 2. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 3. Connect the parking brake cable and brake tube to the carrier cover. 4. Fill the rear final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Differential Gear Oil/Changing Differential Gear Oil. Page 2354 MALFUNCTION AREA CHART Main Line Short Circuit MALFUNCTION AREA CHART Short Circuit DLC Branch Line Circuit DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. Page 227 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 136 Monitor item ACTIVE TEST Test item Page 3360 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Axle Bearing Page 2341 Page 4733 Compressor Clutch: Specifications Clutch Gap Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) Page 2551 Page 5520 13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert. ^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench. ^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece. CAUTION: Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer. 14. Make sure the organizer sides freely. ^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose: a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the end of the plastic insert. Locations Page 1919 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 1544 - No. 1 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with white arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 2136 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 1775 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 4169 Power Socket - Part 2 Page 2117 Page 3681 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching points. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair. REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Page 4112 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2843 Page 4628 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Axle Bearing Page 4103 Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 802 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Locations Page 2358 Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Check the harness and repair the root cause. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Check the harness and repair the root cause. 4. CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT 1. Remove the ECM and the IPDM E/R. 2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals. 3. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 5. NO - Replace the ECM and/or the IPDM E/R. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the "Symptom (Results from interview with customer)" are reproduced. Inspection result Reproduced - GO TO 6. Non-reproduced - Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is detected. 6. CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer System Diagram Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram Page 4062 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 5111 Speaker: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation Woofer WOOFER Removal and Installation SUBWOOFER Removal 1. Remove the front seat LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer connector (B). : Vehicle front 3. Remove the subwoofer bolts (A). 4. Remove the subwoofer (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Tweeter FRONT TWEETER Removal and Installation FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove the front tweeter (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Center Speaker Page 733 Page 201 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 5604 Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures The Light Reminder Warning Does Not Sound THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND Description Light reminder warning does not sound even though headlamp is illuminated. THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH (LIGHTING SWITCH) OPERATION Check that the headlamps operate normally by operating the combination switch (lighting switch). Do they operate normally? YES - GO TO 2 NO - Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Work Flow. 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Perform inspection of the front door switch LH signal circuit. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (King Cab) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH Perform a unit inspection for the front door switch LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure(King Cab) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. NO - Replace the front door switch LH. The Seat Belt Warning Continues Sounding, Or Does Not Sound THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND Description - Seat belt warning does not sound even though driver seat belt is not fastened. - Seat belt warning sounds even though driver seat belt is fastened. THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION 1. With key removed from key switch and the front door LH open, turn lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. 2. Return lighting switch to off position, and insert key into key switch. Does warning chime sound for both steps? YES - GO TO 2 NO Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check the operation of the seat belt warning lamp in the combination meter. Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. NO - GO TO 3 3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT Page 1747 B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number column in Table A , or Table B above. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. NOTE: If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX". ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems. NOTE: During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1022 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD) Changing Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly. 2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified level near the filler plug hole. Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: . 3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). - Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Checking Differential Gear Oil DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it. Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Diagnosis Procedure Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to See: Cruise Control/Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function. ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW 1" indication under the following conditions. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check "BRAKE SW 2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode. Page 1553 Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal And Installation WATER PUMP Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump. Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below. CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane. - Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. - Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 2964 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Rear Seat Belt. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) Page 3825 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a suitable tool. Refer to See: Diagrams. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Service and Repair Wiper Arm: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER ARM Front Wiper Arms REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 2. Remove front RH wiper arm and front LH wiper arm. 3. Remove front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly. Installation 1. Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop). 2. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 3. Install front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly on wiper arms. 4. Install front RH wiper arm and front LH wiper arm. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install wiper arm covers. Refer to See: Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Ensure that wiper blades stop within proper clearance. See Front Wiper Arm Adjustment. FRONT WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Operate windshield washer and wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop). 2. Lift the wiper blade up and then rest it onto glass surface, check the blade clearance "L1" and "L2". 3. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 4. Adjust front wiper arms on wiper motor pivot shafts to obtain above specified blade clearances. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install wiper arm covers. Refer to See: Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. Page 5691 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 4011 Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 4580 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Axle Bearing Locations Page 4384 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front lower link (2). CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt (1). Refer to table below for examples of lower link cam bolt (1) effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the cam bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. Page 4623 Wheels: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 1203 - Position No. 1 camshaft bracket close to the mounting position, and then install it to prevent from touching liquid gasket applied to each surface. - Temporarily tighten the RH (A) and LH (B) front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown. 4. Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows: CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket from the parts listed below. - Mating surface of rocker cover - Mating surface of front cover - A: RH bank - B: Exhaust side - C: LH bank Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position. NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Mirrors/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 485 Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored Classification: EC09-014B Reference: NTB09-048B Date: April 21, 2011 2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have been revised. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All 2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009 2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM. ACTION: Confirm this bulletin applies. Page 297 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb) Page 1340 Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Oil pan (upper) Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan (lower) Page 3901 Locations Locations Procedures Hood Latch: Procedures HOOD Hood Lock Control Inspection CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood opener returns to the original position. 3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown in the figure. Page 4163 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Abbreviation List ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation List The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Audible Warning Device: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Work Flow DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow DETAILED FLOW 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under which the malfunction occurred. - GO TO 2 2.CHECK SYMPTOM Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer. - Check to see if any other malfunctions are present. - GO TO 3 3.CHECK CONSULT-III SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Connect CONSULT-III and perform "SELF-DIAGNOSIS". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function. Are self-diagnosis results normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts, GO TO 5 4.NARROW DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS THROUGH SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Perform symptom diagnosis and repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts. - GO TO 5 5.FINAL CHECK Check that the warning buzzer in the combination meter operates normally. Does it operate normally? YES - Inspection End. NO - GO TO 1 Fail Safe COMBINATION METER Fail Safe The combination meter performs a fail-safe operation for the functions listed below when communication is lost. Page 4005 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 433 19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb). 20. Re-connect the battery cables. 21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details. 22. Re-program the radio presets. 23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for details. Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: Do not overfill. - Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. - Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: . Page 3871 CAUTION: Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. - Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. - Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads. - Attach the check valve in the correct direction. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove engine air duct assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove brake piping from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Replacement. 5. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to See: Vacuum Lines/Removal And Installation. 6. If equipped, disconnect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors from brake booster. 7. Remove brake pedal to clevis attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 8. Remove brake booster to brake pedal assembly nuts. 9. Remove brake booster from dash panel. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection 1. Using a hand vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of - 66.7 kPa (- 500 mmHg, - 19.69 inHg) to brake booster. 2. Check output rod length. Output rod length : Refer to See: Specifications. INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length (B) is set at the specified value. Input rod length (B) : Refer to See: Specifications. 2. After adjusting (B), temporarily tighten lock nut and install brake booster. Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel. 3. Connect brake pedal to clevis of input rod. 4. Install brake booster to brake pedal assembly nuts and tighten to the specified torque. 5. Install brake piping to brake master cylinder. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Diagrams. 6. If equipped, connect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors to brake booster. 7. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. Page 4717 6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins. Page 694 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 2-1/8 U.S. qts (2.0 L) Page 1619 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Installation of Thermostat Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber ring as shown. - Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings, then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation holes. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Locations Page 2535 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 3103 Page 1259 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (US) bearing when the oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. - When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the inside diameter of the bearing installed and grind the journal until the oil clearance falls within specification. Bearing undersize table CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized bearing (All journals). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) Page 4330 SPECIAL TOOLS Locations Specifications Electronic Throttle Actuator: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Throttle Control Motor Technician Safety Information Axle Shaft Assembly: Technician Safety Information PRECAUTIONS Precaution Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing the wheel hub and drive shafts. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. - Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. - Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the component parts. - Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. - Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. - Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with a suitable solvent which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Page 726 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Locations Page 1884 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft relating to the valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Exploded View. Correctly identify the location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up. 3. Turn the crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent the valve from dropping into the cylinder. 4. Remove the valve collet using Tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the valve lifter holes. 5. Remove the valve spring retainer and valve spring. CAUTION: Do not remove the valve spring seat from the valve spring. 6. Remove the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4328 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 4119 Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 5797 Page 2293 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) - Models with ABS CAUTION: Never replace the unit even when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG" at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures. - Models with ABLS CAUTION: Never replace the unit even when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG" at this stage. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures. - Models with VDC CAUTION: Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Removal and Installation Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. Page 1517 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Locations Page 4889 - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. If driver air bag module is being replaced due to deployment, spiral cable must also be replaced. Refer to See: Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair . - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. Page 6122 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Power Window Switch FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front power window switch assembly from the front door finisher RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front power window switch (1) from the power window switch finisher (2) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4687 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 5824 Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER : System Description The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 2355 YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit. NO - Repair the data link connector branch line. ECM Branch Line Circuit ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). ECM - Harness connector E5 - Harness connector F14 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ECM. 2. Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the ECM branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Diagnosis Procedure. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the ECM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Procedure After Replacing ECM. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the ECM branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. BCM Branch Line Circuit BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of BCM. 2. Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals. Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the BCM branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Page 6092 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing. Page 1268 - No. 1 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations indicated with white arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Page 5628 Page 2528 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. ABS Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: - To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools). - Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Page 914 - No. 3 cylinder compression TDC - Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front - A: RH - B: LH - C: Exhaust - D: Intake - E: No. 2 cylinder - F: No. 4 cylinder Page 4431 Power Steering Pump: Removal and Replacement Removal and Installation POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank. 2. Remove air duct assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair. 3. Remove power steering reservoir tank. 4. Remove serpentine drive belt from auto tensioner and power steering pump. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 5. Disconnect pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove high pressure and low pressure piping from power steering oil pump. Refer to See: Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair. 7. Remove bolts, then remove power steering pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair for tightening torque. After installation, bleed air. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment. Disassembly and Assembly POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Disassembly and Assembly INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. Deformed or damaged pulley, bracket, connector or suction pipe. - Oil leakage from the suction pipe or connector. DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Mount the power steering oil pump in a vise as needed. 1. Remove the connector bolt, connector and copper washers. Locations Page 2309 indicate an error between DLC and TCM (line 1-a in the figure below). NOTE: Diag on CAN units are not indicated on the "ECU list" when the CAN line between Diag on CAN unit and the data link connector is open. - For a description of Diag on CAN, refer to See: Description and Operation/Diag On CAN/Description. 2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR: Check each item on "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR". Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit. a. Reception item of "ECM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ECM cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ECM and TCM (line 2-a in the figure below). NOTE: If "UNKWN" is indicated on "TRANSMIT DIAG", then the control unit cannot transmit CAN communication signal to each unit. Draw a line between the control unit and the splice. b. Reception item of "AFS": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means AFS cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between AFS and TCM (line 2-b in the figure below). c. Reception item of "AV": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between AV and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. Page 4224 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals received via CAN communication. CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed. Page 5371 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER Removal 1. Remove the front and rear door welts. 2. Remove the front and rear kicking plates. 3. Remove the center pillar lower finisher. 4. Remove the seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 5. Remove the center pillar assist grip. 6. Remove the center pillar upper finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT PILLAR FINISHER Removal 1. Remove the front pillar assist grip. 2. Remove the front pillar finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. KICKING PLATES Removal Release the clips and remove the front and/or rear kicking plates. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. DOOR PARTING SEALS Removal 1. Open the front and/or rear doors fully. 2. Release the clips and remove the parting seals. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR Page 4117 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3 Page 5778 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 3874 Page 3019 ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS ANTENNA Removal and Installation GPS ANTENNA Removal 1. Remove the center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID C/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the defroster grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector. 5. Remove the GPS antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2762 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 4. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (RH bank and LH bank). CAUTION: While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining. - Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose. 6. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly. 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube. a. Spread open to remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out. CAUTION: Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube. - Do not damage injector nozzles during removal. - Do not bump or drop fuel injectors. - Do not disassemble fuel injectors. 8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube. INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube. Page 2472 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 887 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 2779 Page 2702 CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning . Page 4945 6. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly. 7. Remove center seat belt lower anchor bolt. 8. Remove center seat belt retractor. 9. Remove center anchor bracket cover. 10. Remove push pins from center seat belt webbing sleeve. 11. Remove bolts from anchor bracket and remove center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 12. Remove center belt bracket from floor. 13. Remove seat belt buckles. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bracket bolts before seat installation. - Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bolt after seat installation with the seat cushion raised. A/F Sensor 1 Heater Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A/F Sensor 1 Heater Page 2342 Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Main Line Between TCM And DLC Circuit MAIN LINE BETWEEN TCM AND DLC CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector F14 - Harness connector E5 - Harness connector E50 - Harness connector B75 - Harness connector B69 - Harness connector M40 Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness connectors. A/T assembly - Harness connectors F14 and E5 2. Check the continuity between the A/T assembly harness connector and the harness connector. Models with floor shift - Models with column shift Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the A/T assembly and the harness connector F14. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors E50 and B75. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors E5 and E50. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors B69 and M40. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors. Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 Page 4900 6. Remove the screws, release the clip, and remove the spiral cable. CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable. - Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. 7. Remove the spiral cable connectors. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. - If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement, for steering angle sensor adjustment. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. Page 885 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation . c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check . 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Page 5538 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again. Page 4955 13. Reprogram the radio station presets. 14. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed: ^ Power Window Initialization ^ Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ^ Throttle Valve closed Position Learning ^ Idle Air Volume Learning ^ Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position NOTE: You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset. Page 1968 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 2237 IN-Vehicle Sensor Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the in-vehicle sensor (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2527 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 1711 ^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above. If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow OVERALL SEQUENCE DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data. Page 829 Page 6081 Page 5632 1. Determine your location on the zone map. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Press and hold the (N) switch for about 8 seconds (with HomeLink universal transceiver) or the mode switch for about 11 seconds (without HomeLink universal transceiver). The current zone number will appear in the display. 4. Press the mode or (N) switch repeatedly until the desired zone number appears in the display. Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop pressing the mode or (N) switch and the display will show a compass direction after a few seconds. NOTE: Use zone number 5 for Hawaii. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The compass display is equipped with an automatic correction function. If the compass display reads "CAL" or the direction is not shown correctly, perform the correction procedure below. 1. Press and hold the (N) switch for about 10 seconds (with HomeLink universal transceiver) or the mode switch for about 13 seconds (without HomeLink universal transceiver). The display will read "CAL". 2. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle, in an open, safe place. The initial calibration is completed in about 3 turns. Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 265 Page 4896 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always follow the tightening sequence shown. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "[=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag). Page 283 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 1335 EM-7 Page 568 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Page 2831 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FENDER PROTECTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front mudguard, if equipped. Refer to See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams/Mud Flap/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the plastic clips. 4. Remove the pushpins. 5. Remove the fender protector. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3042 ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2381 Oxygen Sensor: Locations System Diagnosis Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Testing and Inspection ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) Component Inspection REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c. Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Page 22 Page 3900 Page 6115 Page 4141 Locations Page 2701 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Page 2718 Page 699 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1973 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2505 Service and Repair Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the four screws (A) securing the front air control unit (1) to cluster lid D (2). 4. Remove the front air control unit (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807 Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Classification: BT09-004 Reference: NTB09-074 Date: August 7, 2009 2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer. ACTION Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information. NOTE Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. DVD Player Page 4369 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Brake Booster Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Exploded View BRAKE BOOSTER Exploded View With ABS/ABLS With VDC/TCS Removal And Installation BRAKE BOOSTER Removal and Installation Page 556 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Locations Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Exploded View Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Exploded View OIL COOLER Exploded View Page 2276 - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the "SRS AIRBAG". - Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 908 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection COMPRESSION PRESSURE Checking Compression Pressure 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-III). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. - If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. - If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. - If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. - If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/CAN Communication. Page 2245 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 3040 Locations Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Page 3952 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention Classification: EL09-011 Reference: NTB09-030 Date: April 6, 2009 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY CONNECTION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to stay connected when the engine is running. ^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below. IMPORTANT: Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will not be covered under warranty. CAUTION: ^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement. ^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON. ^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first. ^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first. ^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment. ^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.). ^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of the cables. Disclaimer Page 5672 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 2443 Page 238 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 2485 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 2302 - Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates tachometer functions normally. - When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into fail-safe mode. - Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units. INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION Check whether or not "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" by CONSULT-III. NOTE: Root cause cannot be detected using the procedure in this section if "U1000" or "U1001" is not indicated. Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error may temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause. - The procedures for present errors differ from the procedures for past errors. Refer to "DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE". CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART) Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet. NOTE: There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available system types, either style A or style B may be used. CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A) NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart. For Frontal Collision Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Frontal Collision COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check. SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. - Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary. 5. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. - Replace the grommets as necessary. Page 2657 CAUTION: - Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 1787 Page 3468 Relay Control System Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System System Diagram RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram System Description Page 1324 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to See: Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required. CAN Communication System Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication System System Description CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM System Description - CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L). - Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit. They receive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions. - CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity. System Diagram CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM System Diagram Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN communication signal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L. CAN communication system transmits and receives CAN communication signals by the potential difference. CAN Communication Control Circuit CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CAN Communication Control Circuit Page 5529 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2159 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 1935 Page 6048 2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens. 3. Release the personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove. Personal lamp bulb (type B) : 12V - 6W CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped) Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the room/map lamp assembly (2). Refer to See: Courtesy Lamp/Service and Repair. Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from room/map lamp assembly (2) to remove. Page 5808 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : - (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 1444 Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown. Page 3647 Locations Page 4113 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS DVD Player Engine Compartment Page 4122 RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM System Description IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals received via CAN communication. CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed. Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Locations Page 4877 ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. 3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. 3. If the seat belt retractor does not operate within the specifications, replace the retractor assembly. Page 2543 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER On Board Inspection LEAK INSPECTION Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections. Page 2410 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 748 2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification. CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 1883 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 1416 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH). 3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 4302 Page 3917 Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel sensor rotor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor. - Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Connector Symbols HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Connector symbols Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- Page 3184 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 2783 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 987 Coolant: Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. - Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only). CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts. 4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown. 5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for Page 458 Page 4649 Air Duct: Service and Repair Floor Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct. System Diagram Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 1638 e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (RH). INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) - If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. - Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - Arrow indicates Front - Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and apply antiseize lubricant. CAUTION: Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 4365 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Power Consumption Control System Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 293 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. With Intelligent Key System Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 1713 ^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order. B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin. ^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure. ^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. 3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2 appears when reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete). 4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems. NOTE: During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. 5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual as needed. ^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin. Page 2796 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 761 CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : - (C - 4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications. CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226. 14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Page 4839 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Automatic Air Conditioner Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 5458 19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb). 20. Re-connect the battery cables. 21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details. 22. Re-program the radio presets. 23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for details. Page 4259 Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 591 2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens. 3. Release the personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove. Personal lamp bulb (type B) : 12V - 6W CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped) Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the room/map lamp assembly (2). Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Courtesy Lamp/Service and Repair. Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from room/map lamp assembly (2) to remove. Locations Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 385 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 1848 Page 1534 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1758 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 5669 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS ANTENNA Removal and Installation GPS ANTENNA Removal 1. Remove the center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center Console. 2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID C/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the defroster grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation. 4. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector. 5. Remove the GPS antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 5913 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and remove personal lamp lens (1). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tool (A) to protect the housing and lens (1). 3. Pull bulb (2) straight out to remove. Personal lamp bulb (type A) : 12V - 8W FOOTWELL LAMP Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Page 3735 Page 292 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 2191 Page 2875 Knock Sensor: Locations Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 2572 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Page 853 Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) Page 3185 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 5588 Locations Page 58 - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 1287 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 4724 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2) INTAKE SENSOR System Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 2029 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection COMPRESSION PRESSURE Checking Compression Pressure 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-III). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. - If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. - If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. - If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. - If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/CAN Communication. Page 4184 Fuse: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 1186 Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows: CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket from the parts listed below. - Mating surface of rocker cover - Mating surface of front cover - A: RH bank - B: Exhaust side - C: LH bank - D: Intake side - Arrow Indicates Front A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 2185 A/F Sensor 1 Heater Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A/F Sensor 1 Heater Page 2227 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Locations Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 4351 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 3883 Locations Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2212 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 1727 Page 1258 Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals) Page 5567 Warning Chime - Part 3 Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow OVERALL SEQUENCE DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data. Page 3932 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description. Description HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS Description Page 3590 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 3390 2F1310/General Specification. - While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the joint as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, repair or replace the journal parts. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/General Specification. - Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Propeller Shaft 2F1310. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Propeller Shaft 2S1410 PROPELLER SHAFT Removal and Installation COMPONENTS Page 1612 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description METER SYSTEM ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description Page 6055 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation. 2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1761 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 724 CONSULT-III Checking System CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram Page 2566 Page 6176 Quarter Window Glass: Removal and Replacement Removal SIDE WINDOW GLASS Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. If the window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. 3. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When the side window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. Installation SIDE WINDOW GLASS Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. Page 2137 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Exploded View Radiator Cooling Fan: Service and Repair Exploded View ENGINE COOLING FAN Exploded View Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster grille from the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM Classification: EC09-027 Reference: NTB09-121 Date: November 3, 2009 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored, ACTIONS 1. Confirm this bulletin applies. a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin. b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information. 2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM. CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure. Page 2303 CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B) NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart. Page 270 Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 5521 CAUTION: Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle. Page 2241 Page 1757 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 4075 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are not blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground. Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Page 1726 Locations Page 143 Locations Page 3099 Page 607 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (LH). 5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (1). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 319 Page 6171 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 2599 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Page 50 Page 1126 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 4218 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2 Page 2446 Attachment General Procedure Page 317 Page 114 Consult-III Checking System Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1235 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (US) bearing when the oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. - When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the inside diameter of the bearing installed and grind the journal until the oil clearance falls within specification. Bearing undersize table CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized bearing (All journals). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) Page 1790 Page 3248 11. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM. - Arrow Indicate Front 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. Page 5817 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description METER SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The combination meter indicates the received shift position. Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement. Page 4329 System Diagram Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram METER SYSTEM ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Diagram Page 2267 CAN System - Part 2 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 3650 - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 3163 Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown. Page 3322 2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to specification. Page 3164 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair OIL PAN Oil Pan REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Changing A/T Fluid. 2. Remove oil pan clips (1). White Arrow Indicates Vehicle front - Black Arrow Indicates Oil pan bolts - Drain plug (3) 3. Remove oil pan (2). 4. Remove oil pan gasket. 5. Check for foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, has some burned smell, or contains foreign particles then friction material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. CAUTION: If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair. Refer to See: Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning. 6. Remove magnets from oil pan. Installation 1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown. 2. Install the oil pan (2) new oil pan gasket. Page 841 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 1857 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal Layout TERMINAL LAYOUT Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 4513 Control Arm: Service and Repair Lower Link LOWER LINK Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower shock absorber bolt. 3. Remove stabilizer bar connecting rod lower nut using power tool, then separate connecting rod from lower link. Refer to See: Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair . 4. Remove drive shaft, if equipped. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Front Axle Shaft . 5. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 6. Remove lower link bolts (1) and nuts, then the lower link (2). NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam ) bolts and washers. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lower Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Lower Link Bushing Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension . - When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. - After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair . Page 4751 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1) Control System Diagram MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Control System Diagram CONTROL SYSTEM The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below: Control System Description MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM Control System Description CONTROL OPERATION Front air control Page 4109 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Locations Page 4860 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH). 4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (3). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one, then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing. Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Page 1546 - G: No. 6 cylinder - H: No. 8 cylinder - J: No. 1 cylinder - K: No. 3 cylinder - L: No. 5 cylinder - M: No. 7 cylinder 11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance: Locations Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Tail Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 3054 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 3066 Page 2395 Locations Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations Page 3895 - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Exploded View Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exploded View EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Exploded View Page 3862 Disc Rotor Inner Diameter Inspection - Check inner diameter inside drum area of disc rotor. Other Inspections Check shoe sliding surface on back plate for excessive wear and damage. - Check anti-rattle pins for excessive wear and corrosion. - Check return springs for sagging. - Check adjuster for rough operation. - When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the threads. - Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside drum area of disc rotor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly. - Assemble adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow. - Shorten adjuster by rotating it.